Acer G24 Motorola Developer’s Guide User Manual To The E0826e09 682a 4d04 81a2 C7a6be26229f

User Manual: Acer G24 to the manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 642

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Technical
Information

MOTOROLA G24 DEVELOPER’S GUIDE
AT C OMMANDS R EFERENCE M ANUAL

Title Page

ENGLISH
DECEMBER 31, 2007
6889192V28-G

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
Notice
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola, Inc. assumes no liability resulting
from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from use of the information obtained herein. The information in this
document has been carefully checked and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for
inaccuracies or omissions. Motorola, Inc. reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein and reserves the
right to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of
revisions or changes. Motorola, Inc. does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product, software, or
circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patent rights or the rights of others.
It is possible that this publication may contain references to, or information about Motorola products (machines and programs),
programming, or services that are not announced in your country. Such references or information must not be construed to mean
that Motorola intends to announce such Motorola products, programming, or services in your country.

Copyrights
This instruction manual, and the Motorola products described in this instruction manual may be, include or describe copyrighted
Motorola material, such as computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and
other countries preserve for Motorola and its licensors certain exclusive rights for copyrighted material, including the exclusive
right to copy, reproduce in any form, distribute and make derivative works of the copyrighted material. Accordingly, any
copyrighted material of Motorola and its licensors contained herein or in the Motorola products described in this instruction
manual may not be copied, reproduced, distributed, merged or modified in any manner without the express written permission of
Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel,
or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, as arises by operation of law in the sale
of a product.

Computer Software Copyrights
The Motorola and 3rd Party supplied Software (SW) products described in this instruction manual may include copyrighted
Motorola and other 3rd Party supplied computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United
States and other countries preserve for Motorola and other 3rd Party supplied SW certain exclusive rights for copyrighted
computer programs, including the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program.
Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola or other 3rd Party supplied SW computer programs contained in the Motorola products
described in this instruction manual may not be copied (reverse engineered) or reproduced in any manner without the express
written permission of Motorola or the 3rd Party SW supplier. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed
to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of
Motorola or other 3rd Party supplied SW, except for the normal non-exclusive, royalty free license to use that arises by operation
of law in the sale of a product.

VENDOR COPYRIGHT
Apache Software Foundation - Copyright 2004-2005 All Rights Reserved

Usage and Disclosure Restrictions
License Agreements
The software described in this document is the property of Motorola, Inc. and its licensors. It is furnished by express license
agreement only and may be used only in accordance with the terms of such an agreement.

Copyrighted Materials
Software and documentation are copyrighted materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of the software
or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or
computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola, Inc.

High Risk Materials
Components, units, or third-party products used in the product described herein are NOT fault-tolerant and are NOT designed,
manufactured, or intended for use as on-line control equipment in the following hazardous environments requiring fail-safe
controls: the operation of Nuclear Facilities, Aircraft Navigation or Aircraft Communication Systems, Air Traffic Control, Life
Support, or Weapons Systems (High Risk Activities"). Motorola and its supplier(s) specifically disclaim any expressed or implied
warranty of fitness for such High Risk Activities.

Trademarks

MOTOROLA and the Stylized M Logo are registered in the US Patent & Trademark Office. All other product or service names
are the property of their respective owners.
©Copyright 2007 Motorola, Inc.
Copyright, Trademarks and Disclaimer
REV052604

Table of Contents

Manual Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxi
Target Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxi
Manual Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxi
Applicable Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii
Contact Us . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii
Text Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii
Manual Banner Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
Field Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
General Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxiii
Caring for the Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxiv
Limitation of Liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Warranty Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
How to Get Warranty Service? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxvi
Claiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxvi
Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
What is Not Covered by the Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvii
Installed Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviii
Out of Warranty Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxviii
Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxix
Chapter 1:

Product Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
Connectivity Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
GPRS Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Technical Description (GPRS – Class B Operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
CSD Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Technical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Improved OEM Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
SIM Application Toolkit (STK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Technical Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Profile Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Data Transfer into the SIM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Set up Idle Mode Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Menu Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Call Control by SIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

i

Table of Contents

TCP/UDP IP Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
UDP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Online Data Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
SSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Technical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Technical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
MUX Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Technical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Short Message Service (SMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Technical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Email Message Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Technical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Character Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
ASCII Character Set Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
GSM Character Set Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
UCS2 Character Set Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
UTF-8 Character Set Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
8859-1 Character Set Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
AT Commands Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Chapter 2:

ii

Introduction to AT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
AT Commands Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
General Symbols Used in AT Commands Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
General System Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
AT Commands Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
AT Commands Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Command Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Results Code Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Response and Indications Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
AT Commands Protocol & Structure Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Command Token Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Basic Syntax Command Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
S-parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Extended Syntax Command Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Command Argument Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Numeric Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
String Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Command Mode Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Parameter Set Command Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Table of Contents

Parameter Read Command Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Test Command Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Range of Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compound Range of Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aborting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Core AT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 3:

2-7
2-7
2-8
2-8
2-8
2-8
2-9

AT Commands Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
Modem ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Subscriber Unit Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
+CGMI, +GMI, +FMI, Request Manufacturer ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
+CGMM, +GMM, +FMM, Request Model ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
+CGMR, +GMR, +FMR, Request Revision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
+CGSN, +GSN, Request Product Serial Number Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
+CSCS, Select Terminal Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
+CIMI, Request IMSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
+CFSN, Read Factory Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
I, Request Identification Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
+CNUM, Request MSISDN(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
$, List of All Available AT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
+CLAC, List of All Available AT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Capability Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Call Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Managing a CSD (Data) Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Simple Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Switching From Data Mode to Command Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Hanging Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Dialing to an Electronic Telephone Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Receiving a Data Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Call Control AT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
D, Dial Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
D>, Direct Dialing from Phone Books. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
DL, Dial Last Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
H, Hang-up Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
A, Answer Incoming Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
+CRC, Cellular Result Codes and RING, +CRING - Incoming Call Indication. . . . . . . . . . 3-19
+CLIP, Calling Line Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
+CCWA, Call Waiting Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
+CHLD, Call Related Supplementary Services Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
+CCFC, Call Forwarding Number and Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
+CLIR, Calling Line Identification Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
+CBST, Select Bearer Service Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
O, Return to Online Data State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
&Q, Asynchronous Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
+CHUP, Hang Up Call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
+CSNS, Single Numbering Call Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
+MDC, Selection of Desired Message to Be Displayed Upon Connection of a Voice Call . 3-38
+CTFR1, Divert an Incoming Call When User Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
+MFIC, Filtering Incoming Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
+MHUP, Motorola Hung UP call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
+MVC, Motorola Vocoders Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
+MTTY, Motorola TTY Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

iii

Table of Contents

Call Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CPAS, Phone Activity Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CLCC, List Current Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MCST, Call Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+TCLCC, List Current Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MNTFY, Motorola NoTiFY Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Advice of Charge Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CAOC, Advice of Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CACM, Accumulated Call Meter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CAMM, Accumulated Call Meter Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CPUC, Price per Unit and Currency Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CR, Service Reporting Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplementary Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CSSN, Supplementary Service Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CUSD, Unstructured Supplementary Service Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+COLP, Connected Line Identification Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone and Date Books and Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directory Access Commands - Phone Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CPBS, Select Phone Book Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CPBR, Read Phone Book Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CPBF, Find Phone Book Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CPBW, Write Phone Book Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CSVM, Set Voice Mail Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MDSI, Motorola Deactivate SIM Card Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MCSN, Motorola Change Subscriber Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MPDPM, Motorola Phonebook Dynamic Percentage Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directory Access Commands - Date Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MALARM, Date Book Reminder Unsolicited Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MALMH, Terminate the Current Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MDBGD, Defines General Setting for Date Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MDBR, Read Date Book Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MDBW, Write Date Book Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MDBWE, Write Date Book Exception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Date and Time Access Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CCLK, Read/Set System Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

iv

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-46
3-46
3-47
3-49
3-51
3-53
3-55
3-55
3-57
3-58
3-60
3-61
3-62
3-62
3-65
3-69
3-71
3-71
3-71
3-73
3-75
3-76
3-77
3-78
3-81
3-85
3-86
3-86
3-87
3-88
3-89
3-91
3-93
3-96
3-96
3-98

December 31, 2007

Table of Contents

SMS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
+CSMS, Select Message Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-98
+CPMS, Preferred Message Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-99
+CMGF, Message Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101
+CSCA, Service Center Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-101
+CSMP, Set Text Mode Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-104
+CSDH, Show Text Mode Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-106
+CNMI, New Message Indications to Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107
+CNMA, New Message Acknowledgment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-108
+CMTI, Unsolicited Response (New SMS-DELIVER Receipt Indication) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110
+CMT, Unsolicited Response (New SMS-DELIVER Receipt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110
+CBM, Unsolicited Response (New CB Message Receipt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112
+CDSI, Unsolicited Response (New SMS-STATUS-REPORT Indication) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112
+CDS, Unsolicited Response (New SMS-STATUS-REPORT Receipt). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113
+CMGL, +MMGL, List Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114
+CMGR, +MMGR, Read Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-118
+MMAR, Motorola Mark As Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-125
+CMSS, Send Message From Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-125
+CMGW, Write Message to Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-127
+CMGD, Delete Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-132
+CGSMS, Select Service for MO SMS Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-133
+CMGS, Send SM to Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-134
+CSCB, Cell Broadcast Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-135
+MCSAT, Motorola Control SMS Alert Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-137
+MEDT, Motorola Enable/Disable Tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-139
+MEGA, Email Gateway Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-141
+TSMSRET, Control SMS Sending Retry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-142
+MRICS, Motorola Ring Indicator Configuration for SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-142
DCS handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-144
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-149
Email Services AT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-149
+MEMISP, Email Account ISP (Internet Service Provider) Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-149
+MEMAS, Email Account Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-150
+MEMGS, Email Account General Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-152
+MEMDE, Download Email Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-154
+MEMSE, Send Email Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-156
+MEML, List Email Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-159
+MEMR, Read Email Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-162
+MEMD, Delete Email Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-163
+MEMW, Write or Update Email Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-165
Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-167
Network Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-167
+CSQ, Signal Strength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-167
+CRLP, Radio Link Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-168
+CREG, Network Registration Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-169
+CGREG, GPRS Network Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-171
+COPS, Operator Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-172
+CPOL, Preferred Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-175
+MFS, Motorola Frequency of Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-177
+MCELL, Motorola Cell Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-179
+MCI, Motorola Cell Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-190
Hardware Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-193

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

v

Table of Contents

Hardware Information Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CBC, Battery Charger Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CBAUD, Baud Rate Regulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+IPR, Local Terminal/G24 Serial Port Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+GCAP, Request Overall Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MTDTR, DTR Line Test Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MTCTS, CTS Line Test Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
&K, RTS/CTS Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
&C, Circuit 109 Behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
&D, Circuit 108 Behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MCWAKE, GPRS Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MGGIND, GSM/GPRS Service Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CFUN, Shut Down Phone Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+ICF, DTE-DCE Character Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATS97, Antenna Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MRST, Perform Hard Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+TWUS, Wakeup Reason Set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+TWUR, Wakeup Reason Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+TASW, Antenna Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+TADIAG, Query Antennas ADC Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
READY, Unsolicited Notification (UART Ready Indication). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MPSU, Motorola Physical Second Uart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MIOC, Motorola I/O Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MIOD, Motorola I/O Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MMAD, Query and Monitor ADC Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MPCMC, Continuous PCM Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MVREF, Motorola Voltage Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Audio Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Audio Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Audio Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Audio Setup Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CRSL, Call Ringer Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CLVL, Loudspeaker Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CMUT, Mute/Unmute Currently Active Microphone Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S94, Sidetone Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S96, Echo Canceling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Audio Setup Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MAPATH, Audio Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MAVOL, Volume Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MAMUT, Input Devices Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MAFEAT, Features Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Audio Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MADIGITAL, Analog/Digital Audio Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CALM, Alert Sound Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MDMIC, Enable/Disable Microphone Level Setting in Digital Audio Mode . . . . . . . . . .
+ MMICG, Microphone Gain Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CRTT, Ring Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+VTD, Tone Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+VTS, Command-Specific Tone Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

vi

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-193
3-193
3-194
3-195
3-197
3-197
3-198
3-198
3-199
3-201
3-202
3-203
3-204
3-205
3-206
3-207
3-207
3-209
3-209
3-210
3-211
3-211
3-213
3-217
3-219
3-226
3-227
3-229
3-229
3-230
3-231
3-231
3-232
3-232
3-232
3-233
3-234
3-235
3-236
3-237
3-237
3-240
3-242
3-243
3-244
3-244
3-245
3-246
3-246
3-247
3-250
3-251
3-252

December 31, 2007

Table of Contents

Access Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A/, Repeat Last Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AT, Check AT Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CPIN, Enter PIN for Unlocking SIM Card or Enter PUK for Unblocking SIM Card . . .
+EPIN, Enter SIM PIN2 to Verify PIN2 Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+TPIN, Query Number of Remaining SIM PIN/PUK Entering Attempts. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CPWD, Change Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CLCK, Facility Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+EMPC, Unlocking or Locking Subsidy Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Firmware Update Over the Air (FOTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MFOTAWSCFG, Set the Web-Session Default Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MFOTACNFG, Set the DM Session as Automatic/Non-Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MFOTAREQ, Sends FOTA rEquests Toward DTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MFOTARSP, Respond to +MFOTAREQ Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MFOTAINSTL, Install the FOTA Updated Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MFOTAABORT, Abort the DM Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+ MFOTAIND, Send Unsolicited FOTA Indications Toward the DTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modem Configuration and Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modem Register Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V, G24 Response Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Q, Result Code Suppression. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E, Command Echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X, Result Code Selection and Call Progress Monitoring Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S, Bit Map Registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\S, Show the Status of the Commands and S-registers in Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\G, Software Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\J, Terminal Auto Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\N, Link Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CBAND, Change Radio Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
?, Return the Value of the Last Updated S-register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
&F, Set to Factory Defined Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Z, Reset to Default Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sleep Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sleep Mode AT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sleep Mode HW Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S24, Set Number of Seconds Delay Before G24 Enters Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S102, Set Delay Before Sending Data to the Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S100, Set Minimum Time for Terminal to Fall into Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MSCTS, Enable/Disable CTS During Wakeup Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Handling Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CMEE, Report Mobile Equipment Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CEER, Extended Error Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MGEER, GPRS Extended Error Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UI (User Interface). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CRSM, Restricted SIM Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
&V, View Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
&W, Store User Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
&Y, Default User Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CKPD, Keypad Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MKPD, Auxiliary Keypad Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CMER, Mobile Equipment Event Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CLAN, ME Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CIND, Indicator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MHDPB, Motorola Headset Dual-position Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-252
3-252
3-252
3-253
3-256
3-257
3-258
3-259
3-262
3-265
3-265
3-266
3-268
3-269
3-270
3-270
3-271
3-273
3-273
3-273
3-274
3-275
3-276
3-277
3-280
3-280
3-280
3-280
3-280
3-281
3-281
3-282
3-282
3-283
3-283
3-285
3-286
3-287
3-288
3-289
3-289
3-296
3-299
3-302
3-302
3-307
3-308
3-310
3-310
3-312
3-314
3-315
3-316
3-318
vii

Table of Contents

Unsolicited UI Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CKEV, Key Press Echo Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CDEV, Change Display Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CIEV, Indicator Event Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MUPB, Phone Book Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPRS/EDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPRS Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPRS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CGCLASS, GPRS Mobile Station Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CGDCONT, Define PDP Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CGQMIN, Quality of Service Profile (Min Acceptable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CGQREQ, Quality of Service Profile (Requested) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CGATT, GPRS Attach or Detach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D*99, Request GPRS Service "D" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CGPRS, GPRS Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CGACT, PDP Context Activate or Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CGPADDR, GPRS ADDResses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MDLC, Dial Local Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MIAU, IP Addresses Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EDGE Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CGEQREQ, EDGE Quality of Service Profile (requested) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CGEQMIN, (Minimum acceptable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CGEQNEG - (Negotiated) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MCEG, Motorola Control EGPRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STK Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MTKR, Profile Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MTKE, Motorola ToolKit Enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MTKP, Motorola ToolKit Proactive (Unsolicited Indication) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MTKM, Motorola ToolKit Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MTKM, Motorola ToolKit Menu (Response) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MTKC, Motorola ToolKit Call Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MIPCALL, Create a Wireless Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MIPOPEN, Open a Socket (UDP or TCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MIPODM, Open a Socket (UDP or TCP) in Online Data Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MIPCLOSE, Close a Socket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MIPSETS, Set Size and Timeout for Automatic Push . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MIPSEND, Send Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MIPPUSH, Push Data into Protocol Stack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MIPFLUSH, Flush Data from Buffers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MIPRUDP, Receive Data from UDP Protocol Stack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MIPRTCP, Receive Data from TCP Protocol Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MIPSTAT, Status Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MIPDATA, Network Incoming Data Unsolicited Indication in Pseudo-command Mode
MIPXOFF, Flow Control - Xoff. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIPXON, Flow Control - Xon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MIPCONF - Configure Internal TCP/IP stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MPING, Start Ping Execution (ICMP Protocol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MPINGSTAT, Status Update for +MPING Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MSDNS, Set DNS IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MIPCSC, Motorola Control Secured Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MIPCFF, Control Filtering Feature for Incoming TCP Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+MIPSSL, SSL Alerts Unsolicited Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-320
3-320
3-321
3-321
3-322
3-323
3-323
3-323
3-324
3-325
3-327
3-329
3-330
3-332
3-334
3-335
3-336
3-337
3-338
3-340
3-340
3-346
3-352
3-356
3-357
3-358
3-358
3-367
3-368
3-383
3-384
3-385
3-386
3-386
3-387
3-389
3-392
3-394
3-395
3-397
3-398
3-399
3-399
3-400
3-401
3-401
3-402
3-403
3-405
3-409
3-412
3-414
3-417
3-419

December 31, 2007

Table of Contents

NOP - Compatible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IGNORED (Compatible Only) Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fax Class 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fax Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+FCLASS, Select Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+FTS, Transmit Silence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+FRS, Receive Silence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+FTM, Transmit Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+FRM, Receive Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+FTH, Transmit DATA with HDLC Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+FRH, Receive DATA with HDLC Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+IFC, Terminal-G24 Local Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+FPR, Fax Serial Port Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS232 Multiplexer Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protocol Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX States Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX-Init State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supported 27.010 Protocol Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UART Flow Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX Software Flow Control Per Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX UART Port Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
+CMUX, MUX Startup Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX Customer Open Source Code Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
APIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX Channels (Information Data Link Control - IDLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic MUX Channel Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Channel Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AT Commands per Channel Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multiple Channel Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPRS Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IDLC Modem Profile in MUX State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 4:

3-422
3-422
3-423
3-424
3-424
3-425
3-425
3-426
3-428
3-428
3-430
3-430
3-432
3-434
3-434
3-434
3-434
3-435
3-435
3-436
3-436
3-436
3-437
3-437
3-438
3-438
3-439
3-440
3-440
3-440
3-440
3-440
3-441
3-442
3-453
3-453
3-454

Using the Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
Setting Up the G24 (Power On and Initial Actions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Recommended G24 Initialization after Powerup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
RS232 Lines Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Test G24 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Basic Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
SIM Card Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
G24 Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Terminal Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Managing Stored Messages in the G24 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Setting the Notification Indication for Incoming Messages (Using AT+CNMI) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Another Possible Option for Setting the CNMI Notification Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Setting TEXT Mode Parameters (Using AT+CMGW and AT+CMGS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Writing, Saving and Sending Messages (Using AT+CMGW and AT+CMSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Sending Messages (Using AT+CMGS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

ix

Table of Contents

Deleting Messages (Using AT+CMGD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dialing Using ATD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Dialing from Phone Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dialing the Last Number Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Call Manipulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conference Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching Modes (Data Mode/Command Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Establishing GPRS PDP Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activating a Saved Profile in G24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Two Ways to Activate PDP Context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sleep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
STK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Text/Display Idle Mode Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Get Inkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Get Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Play Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Select Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Send SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Up Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Send DTMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Launch Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setup Event List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TCP Data Transfer Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TCP Raw Data Transfer Example (Online Data Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi-point Data Transfer Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Xoff and Xon Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error in Reopening a Valid Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scenarios for Setting Up Handset Mode or Handsfree Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handset Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handsfree Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Firmware Update Over the Air (FOTA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FOTA Command for Non-Automatic Mode (Non-Transparent Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FOTA Command for Automatic Mode (Transparent Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 5:

x

4-13
4-14
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-16
4-16
4-16
4-17
4-18
4-18
4-19
4-19
4-19
4-19
4-21
4-22
4-23
4-23
4-23
4-24
4-24
4-25
4-25
4-25
4-26
4-26
4-27
4-27
4-28
4-29
4-29
4-29
4-30
4-31
4-32
4-33
4-33
4-33
4-33
4-34
4-34
4-35

Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Tools Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
PC Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Fax Communication by Standard 19200 bps Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Using WinFAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Establishing GPRS PDP Context (Using GPRS Manager) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Installing GPRS Manager on a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Configuring a Dialer Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Establishing a Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Table of Contents

Appendix A: Reference Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
AT Commands Alphabetical Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
AT Commands Behaviour When UART 2 Has Full Functionality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
Character Set Table CS1: (GSM -> UCS-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
Character Set Table CS2: (ASCII <-> UTF-8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
Character Set Table CS3: (UCS-2 <-> UTF-8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
Character Set Table CS6: (UCS-2 Full table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
Character Set Table CS7: (ASCII table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
Appendix B: MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
PREMUX State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
MUX-Init State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
MUX State. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Software Procedures Related to RS232 HW Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
RI Hardware Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
DCD Hardware Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
DTR Hardware Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
G24 DTR Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
DSR Hardware Line (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
MUX UART Port Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Controlling the UART Port Speed Within MUX State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Basic Mode UART Software Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Advanced Mode UART Software Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Basic Mode MUX Software Flow Control Per Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Advanced Mode MUX Software Flow Control Per Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
MUX Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Advance Mode Transparency Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Advance Mode Frame Packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Advance Mode Frame Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
MUX State Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
UIH Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
Test UIH Control Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
MSC UIH Control Frame – Virtual Channel V.24 signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-6
MUX Customer Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
MUX Customer Open Source Code Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7
APIs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
MUX Open Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
MUX Close Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

xi

Table of Contents

xii

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

List of Figures

Figure No.

Figure Title

Page No.

1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5

System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Sidetone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Echo Suppression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
G24 with Multiplexer Support Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Email Server Connection Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-16
3-17
3-18
3-19
3-20
3-21
3-22
3-23

AT Commands Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Basic Structure of a Command Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Response to a Command Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Flow and Structure Configuration Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
TTY Hardware Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Temperature Vs. A/D Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-224
Audio Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-230
Basic Audio Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-231
Advanced Audio Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-231
Analog/Digital Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-232
Audio Paths. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-238
G24 Audio Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-240
SIM States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-253
Wakeup-In Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-284
Wake up Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-284
Sleep Mode when S24 > 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-285
G24 Lines when S24 > 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-285
SIM Toolkit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-357
Communication During DTMF Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-375
Communication During Launch Browser Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-376
G24 with and without MUX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-434
PREMUX Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-435
Current MUX Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-435
MUX States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-436
Two-channel Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-441
Four-Channel Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-441
Using the Additional UART. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-442

4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9

Phone State Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Detailed Phone State Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Recommended G24 Initialization Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
RS232 Lines Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Test G24 Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Basic Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
SIM Card Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
G24 Network Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Terminal Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

xiii

List of Figures

Figure No.

xiv

Preliminary

Figure Title

Page No.

4-10
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-17
4-18
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-23
4-24

Call States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
Sleep Mode when S24 > 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
Display Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Get Inkey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
Get Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Play Tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
Set Up Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Select Item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Send SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-25
Set Up Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
Call Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
Send DTMF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Launch Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
Setup Event List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
Handset or Handsfree Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-33

B-1

MUX Integration Packet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

List of Tables

Table No.

Table Title

Page No.

1-1

AT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

2-1

Core AT Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-16
3-17
3-18
3-19
3-20
3-21
3-22
3-23
3-24
3-25
3-26
3-27
3-28
3-29
3-30
3-31
3-32
3-33
3-34
3-35
3-36
3-37
3-38
3-39

+CGSN, +GSN Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
+CSCS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
+CNUM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
D Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
D> Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
DL Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
+CRC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
+CLIP Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
+CCWA Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
+CHLD Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
+CHLD Actions According to Call State and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
+CCFC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
+CLIR Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
+CBST Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
+CSNS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Mapping Table (V.34) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
+MFIC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
+MHUP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
+MVC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
+MTTY Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
+CPAS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
+CLCC Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
+MCST Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50
+TCLCC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
+MNTFY Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
+CAOC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
+CACM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
+CAMM Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
+CPUC Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
+CR Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
+CSSN Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
+CSSI Notification Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
+CSSU Notification Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
+CUSD Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-65
CUSD Termination Cause Table Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
+COLP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
+CPBS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72
+CPBR Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
+CPBF Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

xv

List of Tables

Table No.
3-40
3-41
3-42
3-43
3-44
3-45
3-46
3-47
3-48
3-49
3-50
3-51
3-52
3-53
3-54
3-55
3-56
3-57
3-58
3-59
3-60
3-61
3-62
3-63
3-64
3-65
3-66
3-67
3-68
3-69
3-70
3-71
3-72
3-73
3-74
3-75
3-76
3-77
3-78
3-79
3-80
3-81
3-82
3-83
3-84
3-85
3-86
3-87
3-88
3-89
3-90
3-91

xvi

Table Title

Page No.

+CPBW Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-77
+CSVM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-78
+MDSI Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-80
+MCSN Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-83
+MPDPM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-85
+MALARM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-86
+MDBGD Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-89
+MDBR Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-90
+MDBW Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-92
+MDBWE Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-94
+CCLK Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-97
+CSMS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-98
+CPMS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-100
+CMGF Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-101
+CSCA Input Characters and Hexadecimal Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-102
+CSCA Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-103
+CSMP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-104
VP Relative Format (In Integer Frmat). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-105
+CSDH Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-106
+CNMI Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-107
+CMTI Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-110
+CMT Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-111
+CBM Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-112
+CDSI Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-113
+CDS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-114
+CGML/+MMGL Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-116
+CGMR/+MMGR Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-119
Layout of SMS-DELIVER in PDU Mode (according to GSM03.40) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-120
 for SMS-DELIVER Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-121
Layout of SMS-STATUS-REPORT in PDU Mode (according to GSM03.40) . . . . . . . . . .3-121
 for SMS-STATUS-REPORT Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-123
 for SMS-STATUS-REPORT Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-123
+MMAR Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-125
+CMSS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-126
+CMGW Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-127
Layout of SMS-SUBMIT in PDU Mode: (according to GSM03.40). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-128
Layout of SMS-COMMAND in PDU Mode: (according to GSM03.40). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-128
 for SMS-SUBMIT Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-129
 for SMS-COMMAND Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-130
+CMGD Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-132
+CGSMS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-133
+CMGS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-134
+CSCB Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-136
+MCSAT Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-138
+MEDT Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-140
+MEGA Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-141
+TSMSRET Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-142
+MRICS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-143
 field and +CSCS settings conversion when writing SM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-145
 field and +CSCS settings conversion when reading SM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-146
+MEMISP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-149
+MEMAS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-151

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

List of Tables

Table No.
3-92
3-93
3-94
3-95
3-96
3-97
3-98
3-99
3-100
3-101
3-102
3-103
3-104
3-105
3-106
3-107
3-108
3-109
3-110
3-111
3-112
3-113
3-114
3-115
3-116
3-117
3-118
3-119
3-120
3-121
3-122
3-123
3-124
3-125
3-126
3-127
3-128
3-129
3-130
3-131
3-132
3-133
3-134
3-135
3-136
3-137
3-138
3-139
3-140
3-141
3-142
3-143

Table Title

Page No.

+MEMGS Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-153
+MEMDE Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-155
+MEMSE Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-156
Send/Receive Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-157
+MEML Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-159
+MEMR Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-162
+MEMD Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-164
+MEMW Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-165
+CSQ Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-167
+CRLP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-168
+CREG Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-169
+CGREG Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-171
+COPS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-174
+CPOL Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-176
+MFS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-178
+MCELL Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-179
Title to Screen Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-180
Serving Idle Information Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-181
Circuit Switched Serving Cell Information Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-182
I-PI Serving Cell Miscellaneous Information Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-182
TBF Uplink Data Transfer Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-182
TBF Downlink Data Transfer Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-183
Neighbor Cell Information Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-183
Neighbor Cell Summary Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-183
Reselection Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-184
Hopping Information Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-184
PDP Context Information Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-184
I-PI Serving Cell Paging Parameters Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-185
I-PI Serving Cell Optional SYSINFOs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-185
+MCELL AT Command Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-185
EFEM Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-186
+MCI Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-191
+CBC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-193
+CBAUD Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-195
+IPR Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-196
+MTDTR Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-197
&K Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-199
&C Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-200
&D Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-201
+MCWAKE Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-202
+MGGIND Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-203
+CFUN Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-204
+ICF Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-206
ATS97 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-207
+TWUS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-208
+TASW Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-210
+TADIAG Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-211
+MPSU Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-212
+MIOC Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-214
+MIOD Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-218
Keypad GPIOs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-218
+MMAD Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-221

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

xvii

List of Tables

Table No.
3-144
3-145
3-146
3-147
3-148
3-149
3-150
3-151
3-152
3-153
3-154
3-155
3-156
3-157
3-158
3-159
3-160
3-161
3-162
3-163
3-164
3-165
3-166
3-167
3-168
3-169
3-170
3-171
3-172
3-173
3-174
3-175
3-176
3-177
3-178
3-179
3-180
3-181
3-182
3-183
3-184
3-185
3-186
3-187
3-188
3-189
3-190
3-191
3-192
3-193
3-194
3-195

xviii

Table Title

Page No.

A/D Value to Temperature Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-223
+MPCMC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-226
+MVREF Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-227
+MVREF Signals Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-227
Basic and Advanced Audio Modes Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-230
+CRSL Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-233
+CLVL Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-234
+CMUT Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-234
ATS94 and ATS96 Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-235
S94 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-236
ATS96 and ATS94 Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-236
S96 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-237
+MAPATH Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-239
+MAVOL Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-241
MAMUT Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-242
MAFEAT Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-243
+MADIGITAL Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-244
+CALM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-245
+MDMIC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-246
+MMICG Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-247
+CRTT Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-248
Ring Tone Types Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-249
+VTD Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-250
+VTS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-251
SIM Card Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-253
+CPIN Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-254
+EPIN Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-256
+TPIN Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-257
+CPWD Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-258
+CLCK Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-260
+EMPC Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-263
+MFOTAWSCFG Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-266
+MFOTACNFG Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-267
+MFOTAREQ Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-268
+MFOTARSP Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-269
+MFOTAIND Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-271
Effects of Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-273
V Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-274
Qn Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-275
En Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-275
X Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-276
S2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-279
S12 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-280
&F Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-281
Z Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-282
S24 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-286
S102 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-287
Command parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-288
+MSCTS Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-289
+CMEE Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-290
+CME Errors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-291
+CMS Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-293

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

List of Tables

Table No.
3-196
3-197
3-198
3-199
3-200
3-201
3-202
3-203
3-204
3-205
3-206
3-207
3-208
3-209
3-210
3-211
3-212
3-213
3-214
3-215
3-216
3-217
3-218
3-219
3-220
3-221
3-222
3-223
3-224
3-225
3-226
3-227
3-228
3-229
3-230
3-231
3-232
3-233
3-234
3-235
3-236
3-237
3-238
3-239
3-240
3-241
3-242
3-243
3-244
3-245
3-246
3-366

Table Title

Page No.

+STK Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-294
+CEER Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-297
+MGEER Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-300
+CRSM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-303
&W Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-308
Profile Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-308
&Y Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-310
+CKPD Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-311
Character Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-311
+MKPD Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-313
+CMER Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-314
+CLAN Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-315
+CIND Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-317
+MHDPB Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-318
+CKEV Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-320
+CDEV Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-321
+CIEV Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-321
+MUPB Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-322
+CGCLASS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-324
+CGDCONT Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-326
+CGQMIN Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-328
+CGQREQ Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-330
+CGATT Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-331
D*99 Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-333
+GPRS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-334
+CGACT Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-335
+CGPADDR Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-337
+MIAU Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-339
+CGEQREQ Command Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-343
+CGEQMIN Command Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-349
+CGEQNEG Command Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-353
+MCEG Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-356
STK Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-358
+MTKR Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-359
Profile Structure – Byte 1 (Download). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-359
Profile Structure – Byte 2 (Other) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-360
Profile Structure – Byte 3 (Proactive SIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-360
Profile Structure – Byte 4 (Proactive SIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-360
Profile Structure – Byte 5 (Event driven information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-361
Profile Structure – Byte 6 (Event driven information extensions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-361
Profile Structure – Byte 7 (Multiple card proactive commands) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-361
Profile Structure – Byte 8 (Proactive SIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-362
Profile Structure – Byte 9 (Proactive SIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-362
Profile Structure – Byte 10 (Soft keys support) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-363
Profile Structure – Byte 11 (Soft keys information). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-363
Profile Structure – Byte 12 (Bearer independent protocol proactive commands – class "e")3-364
Profile Structure – Byte 13 (Bearer independent protocol supported bearers – class "e"). . 3-364
Profile Structure – Byte 14 (Screen height) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-364
Profile Structure – Byte 15 (Screen width). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-365
Profile Structure – Byte 16 (Screen effects) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-365
Profile Structure – Byte 17 (Bearer independent protocol supported transport interface – class "e")

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

xix

List of Tables

Table No.

xx

Table Title

Page No.

3-247
3-248
3-249
3-250
3-251
3-252
3-253
3-254
3-255
3-256
3-257
3-258
3-259
3-260
3-261
3-262
3-263
3-264
3-265
3-266
3-267
3-268
3-269
3-270
3-271
3-272
3-273
3-274
3-275
3-276
3-277
3-278
3-279
3-280
3-281
3-282
3-283
3-284
3-285
3-286
3-287
3-288
3-289
3-290
3-291

Profile Structure – Byte 18 (Reserved) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-366
Profile Structure – Byte 19 (Reserved for TIA/EIA-136 facilities) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-367
+MTKE Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-367
+MTKP Field Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-369
+MTKP Parameters of MTKP Field Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-370
+MTKP Set Command Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-373
+MTKP Parameters – Response Code 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-376
Current Event Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-376
Set Event List Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-378
Sample Language Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-379
+MTKM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-383
+MTKM Unsolicited Identification Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-384
+MTKC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-385
+MIPCALL Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-386
+MIPOPEN Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-388
+MIPODM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-391
+MIPCLOSE Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-393
+MIPSETS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-394
+MIPSEND Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-396
+MIPPUSH Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-397
+MIPFLUSH Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-398
+MIPRUDP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-399
+MIPRTCP Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-400
+MIPSTAT Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-400
MIPDATA Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-401
+MIPCONF Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-403
+MPING Command Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-406
+MPING Unsolicited Response Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-408
+MPINGSTAT Unsolicited Response Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-410
+MSDNS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-412
+MIPCSC Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-415
+MIPCFF Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-418
+MIPSSL Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-420
+MIPSSL Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-420
+FCLASS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-424
+FTS Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-425
+FRS Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-426
Command Modulation Select Codes - Modulation Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-427
Command Modulation Select Codes -Modulation Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-428
Command Modulation Select Codes - Modulation Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-429
 and  Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-431
+FPR Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-432
+CMUX Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-439
AT Commands Limitations for 4-Channel Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-443
Multiple Channel Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-453

A-1
A-2

AT Commands (Alphabetical) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
AT Commands Behaviour With UART2 Fully Functional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22

B-1
B-2
B-3

MUX Mode Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Protected Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
MUX State Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Preface
Manual Scope
This manual introduces the G24 AT commands, and describes how software developers can use
these commands to communicate with the G24 device, and to create software applications that
communicate with the G24 using these commands.
Note: The integrator should read the corresponding SW release notes for the G24 version he is

using to get information about differences from this manual.

Target Audience
This manual is intended for software developers who communicate with the G24 device using the
AT commands, and create applications to communicate with the G24 device using the AT
commands.

Manual Organization
This manual contains the following chapters:
• “Preface” provides a scope for this manual, document convention, safety instructions and a
liability notification.
• “Chapter 1: Product Features” introduces the new product features and provides a list of the
AT commands.
• “Chapter 2: Introduction to AT Commands” provides an introduction to the AT commands,
and includes a general explanation of the command’s format and usage. It also describes
supported character sets and error handling.
• “Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference” provides a reference to all available AT commands,
including examples, where relevant.
• “Chapter 4: Using the Commands” provides scenarios and examples for implementing
various G24 functionality, including G24 setup and connectivity, SMS, call control, data
calls, GPRS, Sleep mode, audio, TCP/IP, STK and MUX user integration.
• “Chapter 5: Tools” describes the PC Driver and PC Loader tools provided by the
application.
• “Appendix A: Reference Tables” provides conversions between different character sets. It
also provides an alphabetical list of all the AT commands.
• “Appendix B: MUX” describes the MUX’s PREMUX and MUX states.

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

xxi

Applicable Documents

Applicable Documents
• G24 Module Hardware Description – 6889192V27
• G24 Developer’s Kit – 6889192V26

Contact Us
We at Motorola want to make this guide as helpful as possible. Keep us informed of your
comments and suggestions for improvements.
For general contact, technical support, report documentation errors and to order manuals, use this
email address:
M2M.CustomerCare@motorola.com
Motorola appreciates feedback from the users of our information.

Text Conventions
The following special paragraphs are used in this guide to point out information that must be read.
This information may be set-off from the surrounding text, but is always preceded by a bold title
in capital letters:

Note
Note: Presents additional, helpful, noncritical information that you can use.

Warning
Warning:

Presents information to warn you of a potentially hazardous situation in which there
is a possibility of personal injury.

Important
Important:

Presents information to help you avoid an undesirable situation
or provides additional information to help you understand a topic or concept.

Caution
Caution:

xxii

Presents information to identify a situation in which damage to software, stored
data, or equipment could occur, thus avoiding the damage.

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Preface

Manual Banner Definitions
A banner text in the page footer under the book title (for example, Preliminary or FOA) indicates
that some information contained in the manual is not yet approved for general customer use.

Field Service
For Field Service requests, use this email address:
n2csfs01@motorola.com

General Safety
Remember!. . . safety depends on you!
The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation,
service, and repair of the equipment described in this manual. Failure to comply with these
precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of
design, manufacture, and intended use of the equipment. Motorola, Inc. assumes no liability for
the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements. The safety precautions listed below
represent warnings of certain dangers of which we are aware. You, as the user of this product,
should follow these warnings and all other safety precautions necessary for the safe operation of
the equipment in your operating environment.

Ground the instrument
To minimize shock hazard, the equipment chassis and enclosure must be connected to an
electrical ground. If the equipment is supplied with a three-conductor AC power cable, the power
cable must be either plugged into an approved three-contact electrical outlet or used with a threecontact to two-contact adapter. The three-contact to two-contact adapter must have the grounding
wire (green) firmly connected to an electrical ground (safety ground) at the power outlet. The
power jack and mating plug of the power cable must meet International Electrotechnical
Commission (IEC) safety standards.
Note: Refer to “Grounding Guideline for Cellular Radio Installations”–Motorola part no.

68P081150E62.

Do not operate in an explosive atmosphere
Do not operate the equipment in the presence of flammable gases or fumes. Operation of any
electrical equipment in such an environment constitutes a definite safety hazard.

Do not service or adjust alone
Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person, capable of rendering first aid
is present.

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

xxiii

Caring for the Environment

Keep away from live circuits
Operating personnel must:

• not remove equipment covers. Only Factory Authorized Service Personnel or other qualified
maintenance personnel may remove equipment covers for internal subassembly, or
component replacement, or any internal adjustment

• not replace components with power cable connected. Under certain conditions, dangerous
voltages may exist even with the power cable removed

• always disconnect power and discharge circuits before touching them

Do not substitute parts or modify equipment
Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute parts or perform
any unauthorized modification of equipment. Contact Motorola Warranty and Repair for service
and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained.

Dangerous procedure warnings
Warnings, such as the example below, precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this
manual. Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed. You should also employ all
other safety precautions that you deem necessary for the operation of the equipment in your
operating environment.
Warning example:
Warning:

Dangerous voltages, capable of causing death, are present in this equipment. Use
extreme caution when handling, testing, and adjusting.

Caring for the Environment
The following information is provided to enable regulatory compliance with the European Union
(EU) Directive 2002/96/EC Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) when using
Motorola equipment in EU countries.

Disposal of Motorola equipment in EU countries

Please do not dispose of Motorola equipment in landfill sites.
In the EU, Motorola in conjunction with a recycling partner will ensure that equipment is
collected and recycled according to the requirements of EU environmental law.
xxiv

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Preface

Please contact the Customer Network Resolution Center (CNRC) for assistance. The 24 hour
telephone numbers are listed at
http://mynetworksupport.motorola.com

Select Customer Network Resolution Center contact information.
Alternatively if you do not have access to CNRC or the internet, contact the Local Motorola
Office.

Disposal of Motorola equipment in non-EU countries
In non-EU countries, dispose of Motorola Networks equipment in accordance with national and
regional regulations.

Limitation of Liability
The Products are not designed, intended, or authorized for use as components in systems intended
for surgical implant into the body; in other applications intended to support or sustain life; for the
planning, construction, maintenance, operation or use of any nuclear facility; for the flight,
navigation, communication of aircraft or ground support equipment; or in any other application in
which the failure of the Product could create a situation where personal injury or death may occur.
If CUSTOMER should use any Product or provide any Product to a third party for any such use,
CUSTOMER hereby agrees that MOTOROLA is not liable, in whole or in part, for any claims or
damages arising from such use, and further agrees to indemnify and hold MOTOROLA harmless
from any claim, loss, cost or damage arising from such use.
EXCEPT AS SPECIFICALLY STATED ABOVE, THE PRODUCTS ARE PROVIDED "AS IS"
AND MOTOROLA MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED,
STATUTORY, OR OTHERWISE REGARDING THE PRODUCTS. MOTOROLA
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF
DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE.
Under no circumstances shall MOTOROLA be liable to CUSTOMER or any other party for any
costs, lost revenue or profits or for any other special, incidental or consequential damages, even if
MOTOROLA has been informed of such potential loss or damage. And in no event shall
MOTOROLA's liability to CUSTOMER for damages of any nature exceed the total purchase
price CUSTOMER paid for the Product at issue in the dispute, except direct damages resulting
from patent and/or copyright infringement, which shall be governed by the "INDEMNITY"
Section of this Agreement.
The preceding states MOTOROLA's entire liability for MOTOROLA's breach or failure to
perform under any provision of this Agreement.

Warranty Notification
Motorola guarantees to you, the original purchaser, the OEM module and accessories which you
have purchased from an authorized Motorola dealer (the "Products"), to be in conformance with
the applicable Motorola specifications current at the time of manufacture for a term of [1] year
from date of purchase of the Product(s) (Warranty Term).
You must inform Motorola of the lack of conformity to the applicable specifications of any of the
Products within a period of two (2) months from the date on which you detect a defect in
material, workmanship or lack of conformity and in any event within a term not to exceed the
December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

xxv

How to Get Warranty Service?

Warranty Term, and must immediately submit the Product for service to Motorola's Authorized
Repair or Service Center. Motorola shall not be bound by Product related statements not directly
made by Motorola nor any warranty obligations applicable to the seller.
A list of the Motorola Call Center numbers is enclosed with this Product.
During the Warranty term, Motorola will, at its discretion and without extra charge, as your
exclusive remedy, repair or replace your Product which does not comply with this warranty; or
failing this, to reimburse the price of the Product but reduced to take into account the use you
have had of the Product since it was delivered. This warranty will expire at the end of the
Warranty Term.
This is the complete and exclusive warranty for a Motorola OEM module and accessories and in
lieu of all other warranties, terms and conditions, whether express or implied.
Where you purchase the product other than as a consumer, Motorola disclaims all other
warranties, terms and conditions express or implied, such as fitness for purpose and satisfactory
quality.
In no event shall Motorola be liable for damages nor loss of data in excess of the purchase price
nor for any incidental special or consequential damages* arising out of the use or inability to use
the Product, to the full extent such may be disclaimed by law.
This Warranty does not affect any statutory rights that you may have if you are a consumer, such
as a warranty of satisfactory quality and fit for the purpose for which products of the same type
are normally used under normal use and service, nor any rights against the seller of the Products
arising from your purchase and sales contract.
(*)including without limitation loss of use, loss of time, loss of data, inconvenience, commercial
loss, lost profits or savings.

How to Get Warranty Service?
In most cases the authorized Motorola dealer which sold and/or installed your Motorola OEM
module and original accessories will honor a warranty claim and/or provide warranty service.
Alternatively, for further information on how to get warranty service please contact either the
customer service department of your service provider or Motorola's call Center at
n2csfs01@motorola.com.

Claiming
In order to claim the warranty service you must return the OEM module and/or accessories in
question to Motorola's Authorized Repair or Service Center in the original configuration and
packaging as supplied by Motorola. Please avoid leaving any supplementary items like SIM
cards. The Product should also be accompanied by a label with your name, address, and telephone
number; name of operator and a description of the problem.
In order to be eligible to receive warranty service, you must present your receipt of purchase or a
comparable substitute proof of purchase bearing the date of purchase. The phone should also
clearly display the original compatible electronic serial number (IMEI) and mechanic serial
number [MSN]. Such information is contained with the Product.
You must ensure that all and any repairs or servicing is handled at all times by a Motorola
Authorized Service Center in accordance with the Motorola Service requirements.

xxvi

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Preface

In some cases, you may be requested to provide additional information concerning the
maintenance of the Products by Motorola Authorized Service Centers only, therefore it is
important to keep a record of any previous repairs, and make them available if questions arise
concerning maintenance.

Conditions
This warranty will not apply if the type or serial numbers on the Product has been altered, deleted,
duplicated, removed, or made illegible. Motorola reserves the right to refuse free-of-charge
warranty service if the requested documentation can not be presented or if the information is
incomplete, illegible or incompatible with the factory records.
Repair, at Motorola's option, may include reflashing of software, the replacement of parts or
boards with functionally equivalent, reconditioned or new parts or boards. Replaced parts,
accessories, batteries, or boards are warranted for the balance of the original warranty time
period. The Warranty Term will not be extended. All original accessories, batteries, parts, and
OEM module equipment that have been replaced shall become the property of Motorola.
Motorola does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the products, accessories,
batteries or parts.
Motorola will not be responsible in any way for problems or damage caused by any ancillary
equipment not furnished by Motorola which is attached to or used in connection with the
Products, or for operation of Motorola equipment with any ancillary equipment and all such
equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty.
When the Product is used in conjunction with ancillary or peripheral equipment not supplied by
Motorola, Motorola does not warrant the operation of the Product/peripheral combination and
Motorola will not honor any warranty claim where the Product is used in such a combination and
it is determined by Motorola that there is no fault with the Product. Motorola specifically
disclaims any responsibility for any damage, whether or not to Motorola equipment, caused in
any way by the use of the OEM module, accessories, software applications and peripherals
(specific examples include, but are not limited to: batteries, chargers, adapters, and power
supplies) when such accessories, software applications and peripherals are not manufactured and
supplied by Motorola.

What is Not Covered by the Warranty
This warranty is not valid if the defects are due to damage, misuse, tampering, neglect or lack of
care and in case of alterations or repair carried out by unauthorized persons.
The following are examples of defects or damage not covered by this product warranty
1. Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary
manner.
2. Defects or damage from misuse, access to incompatible sources, accident or neglect.
3. Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, adjustment,
unauthorized software applications or any alteration or modification of any kind.
4. Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material or
workmanship.
5. Products disassembled or repaired other than by Motorola in such a manner as to adversely
affect performance or prevent adequate inspection and testing to verify any warranty claim.

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

xxvii

Installed Data

6. Defects or damage due to range, coverage, availability, grade of service, or operation of the
cellular system by the cellular operator.
7. Defects or damage due to moist, liquid or spills of food.
8. Control unit coil cords in the Product that are stretched or have the modular tab broken.
9. All plastic surfaces and all other externally exposed parts that are scratched or damaged due
to customer normal use.
Depending on operating conditions and your usage habits, wear and tear might take place of
components including mechanical problems related to Product housing, paint, assembly, subassemblies, displays and keyboards and any accessories which are not part of the Product's in-box
configuration. The rectification of faults generated through wear and tear and the use of
consumable items like batteries beyond their Optimum Performance Time as indicated in the
product manual is considered to be your responsibility and therefore Motorola will not provide
the free Warranty repair service for these items.

Installed Data
Please make and retain a note of all data you have inserted into your product. For example names,
addresses, phone numbers, user and access codes, notes etc. before submitting your product for a
warranty service as such data may be deleted or erased as part of the repair or service process.
Please note if you have downloaded material onto your product, for example ring tones, ring
tunes, screensavers, wallpaper, games, etc. These may be deleted or erased as part of the repair
process or testing process. Motorola shall not be responsible for such matters. The repair or
testing process should not affect any such material that was installed by Motorola on your product
as a standard feature.

Out of Warranty Repairs
If you request Motorola to repair your product any time after the warranty term or where this
warranty does not apply due to the nature of the defect or fault, then Motorola may in its
discretion carry out such repairs subject to you paying Motorola its fees for such a repair or it may
refer you to an authorized third party to carry out such repairs.

xxviii

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Preface

Revision History
Manual Number
6889192V28-G

Manual Title
G24 Developer’s Guide: AT Commands Reference Manual

Version Information
The following table lists the manual version, date of version, and remarks about
the version.
Revision History
Version

Date Issue

Remarks

A

January 1, 2006

Initial Release

B

April 1, 2006

Updated with SW version G24_G_0C.11.52R.
Commands added: +CIND, +EMPC, +MFIC, +MIOC, +MIOD,
+TASW, +TPIN, +TSMSRET
Commands removed: +CDEV, +GCAP

C

June 29, 2006

Updated with SW version G24_G_0C.11.61R.
Commands added: +CDEV, +CFSN, +CGEQMIN, +CGEQNEG,
+CGEQREQ, +CLAN, +CRSM, +EPIN, +GCAP, +MGGIND,
+MMAD, +MPING, +MPINGSTAT, +TADIAG, +TCLCC, +TWUS
Commands updated: +CBAUD, +CME Errors, +CMGS, +CMS Errors,
+CMUX, I, +IPR, +MCWAKE, +MIPOPEN

D

September 1, 2006

Updated with SW version - September official release.
Commands added: +MIPDATA, +MIPODM, +MSDNS
Commands updated: +CFUN, +CRSM, +CRTT, +EMPC, +MDSI,
+MFS, +MMAD, +MPCMC, +MPING
Appendix B updated

E

January 31, 2007

Updated with SW version G24_G_0C.11.80R.
Commands added: +CGPADDR, +MCEG, +MCELL, +MCI,
+MGEER, +MNTFY, +MPSU, +MVC, +MVREF
Commands updated: +CBAUD, +CBC, +CFUN, +CRSL, +CSCB,
+IPR, +MIPODM, +MIPOPEN, +MMAD
Also updated: RS232 Multiplexer Features

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

xxix

Revision History

Revision History (Cont.)
Version

xxx

Date Issue

Remarks

F

May 31, 2007

Updated with SW version G24_G_0C.11.91R.
Commands added: +MDMIC, +MEDT, +MEMAS, +MEMD,
+MEMDE, +MEMISP, +MEMGS, +MEML, +MEMSE, +MEMR,
+MEMW, +MIPCFF, +MIPCSC, +MIPSSL, +MRICS, +MTTY
Commands updated: &K, +CBC, +CPBS, +MGGIND, +MIPODM,
+MIPOPEN, +MIPRTCP, +MIPSTART, +MMAD, +MNTFY

G

December 31,
2007

Updated with SW version G24_G_0C.11.XXR.
Commands added: +MDLC,+MHDPB, +MHUP, +MIAU
Commands updated: &C, &D, +CNUM, +CSCS, +CUSD, H,
+MEMGS, +MEML, +MEMR, +MEMW, +MIPCALL, +MIPODM,
+MIPSETS, +MMAD, +MVC
New features and command groups: Firmware Update Over the Air
(FOTA), Phone and Date Books Directory Access Commands, SIM
Application Toolkit (STK)

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 1: Product Features
Connectivity Interface
The user can establish two types of connections in order to establish an AT command session with
the G24:
• RS232 connection

• USB connection
The user can use either RS232 or USB connections, but not both simultaneously.

GPRS Operation
Overview
The GPRS allows the service subscriber to send and receive data in an end-to-end packet-transfer
mode, without utilizing network resources in circuit-switched mode.

Features and Benefits
GPRS enables the cost-effective and efficient use of network resources for packet mode data
applications:
• Always connected.

• No setup time before data transmission.
• Cost change based on current data communication (not time based).

Technical Description (GPRS – Class B Operation)
The G24 is attached to both GPRS and other GSM services, but can only operate one set of
services at a time (GPRS or CSD).
The G24 can activate a GPRS context and at the same time be alerted for an incoming CSD call.
This functionality is available on the G24 single serial line by either of two procedure options:
Option 1:
1. While in GPRS, listen to the RI signal (RS232) for an incoming CSD call ring.

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

1-1

CSD Operation

2. Upon being interrupted by the RI signal, drop the DTR line to switch to command mode
(depending on the previous DTR configuration: AT&D).
3. Answer the call (suspending the GPRS session).
4. At the end of the call, pull the DTR to resume the GPRS session.
Option 2:
• Use the MUX protocol for virtual channels support, with a unique channel for the GPRS
session (Data) and a unique channel for answering the voice call (command)

CSD Operation
Overview
GSM CSD bearer service, the most widely used data service, provides both a transparent and
non-transparent (error correction and flow control) data rate of 9.6 kbit/s.
Data transfer over Circuit Switched Data (CSD) is possible. Once the connection is established,
data can be transferred to and from the remote side.
The user should take the CSD call setup time into account.
Network operators charge the user for the call time regardless of data usage.

Features and Benefits
CSD operation enables the terminal to perform a data transfer over a circuit switched link.
It enables the user to:
• Connect to a remote modem without any Internet network involvement.

• Own a real IP address and enable its access by connecting to an external ISP.
The following are examples of standard CSD call uses:
• Connecting an Internet Service Provider (ISP).

• Remotely accessing corporate Intranet via Remote Access Server (RAS).
• User specific protocol, where the user defines both the remote and local sides.

Technical Description
GSM network operators typically support the non-transparent CSD bearer service through a
modem interworking function. This means that a G24 initiates a data call and the network routes
the call to the modem interworking function, which is located at the Mobile Switching Center
(MSC) of the GSM network. The modem interworking function then dials the number supplied
by the mobile station.
This is different from voice calls, where the GSM network itself routes the call, often to another
mobile station on the same network. The GSM network does not route data calls - it dials the
requested number on behalf of the mobile station and leaves the routing to the external wireline
telephone network. The main reason for this is that the GSM network has information about what
the user wants to do with the data call. For example, the user may be contacting his or her Internet
1-2

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 1: Product Features

Service Provider (ISP) to send email or dialing the corporate Intranet to set up a virtual private
network (VPN) connection to retrieve confidential customer information from a company
database.

Improved OEM Features
G24 contains the following new and improved features:
• SIM Application Toolkit (STK)

• TCP/IP support
• Audio (digital and analog) - path, gain and algorithm
• User-defined profiles
For a full list of G24 features, refer to the G24 Module Hardware Description manual.

SIM Application Toolkit (STK)
Overview
The SIM Toolkit (STK, also known as the SIM Application Toolkit or SAT) is a set of
applications operated by the network provider (usually the module's SIM provider). If the STK is
supported and enabled on the mobile side, specific data can be obtained via menu browsing.

Features and Benefits
The G24 STK enables the terminal to obtain information via menus created by the provider, for
example, "local news" or "weather info". These menus are provider dependent. Enabling the STK
allows the provider to perform other actions regarding call control, SMS etc.

Technical Description
The STK supports the specific mechanism(s) that SIM applications require to interact and operate
with the G24. Using this mechanism, the SIM can notify the terminal, via the G24, that a specific
action is requested. A full list of supported actions is listed in the Proactive SIM section. For more
information regarding the STK mechanism, refer to the GSM 11.11 [20], GSM 11.14 ETSI
standards.

Profile Download
Profile downloading provides a mechanism for the G24 to transmit information describing its
capabilities to the SIM. During the early, profile download phase of the protocol, the G24
negotiates and confirms its ability to support the capabilities requested by the STK.

Data Transfer into the SIM
STK data transfer uses the short message service (SMS) as a transfer layer.

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

1-3

Improved OEM Features

Set up Idle Mode Text
The proactive SIM mechanism enables the SIM to initiate actions to be handled by the G24.
Using this service, the SIM can inform the G24 that it has information pending for action. The
SIM can issue a variety of protocol commands through this mechanism, for example:
• Displaying text

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Sending a short message
Setting up a voice call to a number held by the SIM
Setting up a data call to a number whose bearer capabilities are held by the SIM
Sending an SS control or USSD string
Playing a tone
Initiating a dialogue with the user (get inkey, get input)
Providing local information from the G24 to the SIM
Profile download
Send DTMF
Set up idle text mode
Launch browser
Set up event list

Menu Selection
The SIM supplies a set of possible menu entries via a proactive SIM command. The menu
selection mechanism is used to transfer the SIM application menu item selected by the user to the
SIM and then via SMS to the provider.

Call Control by SIM
When this service is activated by the SIM, all dialed digit strings, supplementary service control
strings and USSD strings are first passed to the SIM before the G24 sets up the call, the
supplementary service operation or the USSD operation. The SIM has the ability to allow, disable
or modify the call. The STK has the ability to replace a call request, a supplementary service
operation or a USSD operation with another call, for example, a call request by the G24 can be
diverted to a different destination.

1-4

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 1: Product Features

TCP/UDP IP Connection
Overview
The network capabilities are achieved by using different layers of connections. Every layer of
connections provides basic connections to the layer above it. The higher the layer is, the more
capabilities it can provide.
Internet Site
www...

World Wide
Web

TCP/UDP IP
Connection

GSM/
Gateway

RS232

Terminal

GPRS

AT Commands
G24

GPRS
Signaling

PPP Connection

Figure 1-1: System Overview
The three layers of connections are:
• Physical links

• Point-to-point links
• TCP/UDP links

TCP/IP
When establishing the TCP/IP connection the G24 can only be the "initiator". The TCP/IP feature
enables the G24 to be a wireless end point for a TCP/IP socket.
Note: The TCP protocol use the value TTL (Time to live) = 64.

Creating TCP/IP Connections
Connection from the G24 to the Web
The following occurs when creating a TCP/IP connection from the G24 to the Web:
1. The G24 connects to the GPRS network and receives an IP address (using the +MIPCALL
command).

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

1-5

Improved OEM Features

2. The G24 opens a TCP/IP stack as one of its "sockets" (it must know the target’s IP address
and port number).
3. Once the connection is established, data is transferred freely in both directions (upload and
download).
Connection with another G24 using the "GPRS Manager"
The following occurs when creating a TCP/IP connection with another G24 using the "GPRS
Manager":
1. The OEM on the target side (server) uses the "GPRS Manager" application. When using this
application the TCP/IP is external to the OEM. (External TCP stack is used).
2. The target side activates the "server application" (The term "server application" means an
application that has the ability to listen on a given IP address and port number).
3. After connecting to the GPRS network, the "server" sends its IP address to the G24 using an
alternative connection (for example, CSD, SMS and so on).
4. The server application listens on a known port, waiting for G24 to connect.
5. The G24 connects to the same GPRS network as the server, and receives an IP address
(using the +MIPCALL command).
6. The G24 initiates a TCP/IP connection with the listening "server". (It knows the IP address
and port number of the server).
7. Once the server is connected, the TCP/IP connection is created and data can be transferred
freely in both directions (upload and download).

1-6

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 1: Product Features

UDP/IP
The set of AT commands created for the TCP/IP connection is used for the UDP/IP connection as
well. Therefore, UDP/IP must open a UDP stack using the MIPOPEN AT command. The
connection created does not change any concept regarding the
UDP/IP known protocol (which is connectionless), this is just an easy way for the terminal to
specify to the G24 which of the four possible stacks should be used.
When establishing the UDP/IP connection, the G24 is both the "initiator" and the "listener".

Creating UDP/IP Connections
Connection with another G24
The following occurs during a UDP/IP connection with another G24:
1. Side A:
– The G24 connects to the GPRS network and receives an IP address (using the +MIPCALL
command).
– The G24 opens a UDP/IP stack as one of its "sockets" (using the +MIPOPEN and selecting
the protocol UDP).
2. Side B:
– The G24 connects to the GPRS network and receives an IP address (using the +MIPCALL
command).
– The G24 opens a UDP/IP stack as one of its "sockets" (using the +MIPOPEN and selecting
the protocol UDP).
3. Side A and B previously agree on a port number, and exchange their given IP addresses via
other means of connection (SMS, CSD, Voice, DB and so on).
4. The G24 sends and receives data to and from the targeted site as it knows the IP address and
port number of the target.
5. Sending (accumulating) data is done using the +MIPSEND command.
6. Actual send is done using the +MIPPUSH command, by specifying the IP address and port
number of the destination.
Note: Every +MIPPUSH sets the destination IP address and destination port number for the

current and future transactions. These values are used for the next push if not explicitly
overwritten.
Connection from the G24 (client/server) to WEB (client/server)
The following occurs when creating a UDP/IP connection from the G24 (client/server) to WEB
(client/server):
1. Client side:
– The G24 client connects to the GPRS network and receives an IP address (using the
+MIPCALL command).
– The G24 opens a UDP/IP stack as one of its "sockets" (using the +MIPOPEN and selecting
the protocol UDP).
2. The G24 sends data to the Website, as the Web site’s IP address is known and is public, and
the port number is previously agreed upon.
3. Sending (accumulating) data is done by the +MIPSEND command.
4. Actual send is done by the +MIPPUSH command by specifying the Website IP address and
Website port number.
December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

1-7

Improved OEM Features

5. Server side:
– After receiving the first packet from the client, the server knows the IP address and port
number of the G24.
– The IP address and port number for the specific mobile G24 should be saved in the DB.
Note: Every +MIPPUSH sets the destination IP address and destination port number for the

current and future transactions. These values are used for the next push if not explicitly
overwritten.

Online Data Mode
The Online Data Mode (ODM) feature, allows the user to transfer raw data (without using the
+MIPSEND and +MIPPUSH commands) between G24 and Network. The data transfers via
established network connection (socket), based on internal TCP or UDP protocol stack. RS232
connection between G24 and terminal with Hardware flow control is required for the feature
execution.
A special AT Command +MIPODM (instead of +MIPOPEN) is used to open a socket in Online
Data Mode. The command provides a set of parameters for the feature configuration and corrects
performance, see “+MIPODM, Open a Socket (UDP or TCP) in Online Data Mode” on
page 3-389. When a socket is successfully opened in Online Data Mode, all data, comes from
terminal, "as is" is being sent to Network and vice versa: all data, comes from Network, "as is" is
being sent to terminal.
Each socket, opened in Online Data Mode, allocates an accumulating buffer whose size is 1372
bytes. When the user sends amount of data, less then the buffer size, the data is being sent to
Network after a spooling timeout (200 mS), otherwise the data is being sent to Network
immediately.
When ODM feature is executed, pseudo-command mode is enabled in PREMUX state and
disabled in MUX state by default (see RS232 Multiplexer Feature). ODM feature allows the user
to disable pseudo-command mode, when G24 is in PREMUX state by setting "pseudo-command
mode enable/disable" parameter to "1" - see “+MIPODM, Open a Socket (UDP or TCP) in
Online Data Mode” on page 3-389. Disabled pseudo-command mode provides better data
transfer performance.
When G24 is in MUX state and ODM feature executed, a pseudo-command mode is not
supported.
The user can suspend an opened in Online Data Mode socket by entering, for example, ESC
sequence (by default "+++") from terminal, when pseudo-command mode is enabled. In this case
G24 switches to pseudo-command mode, allowing the user to enter AT commands from terminal.
The ATO command used to resume Online Data Mode from pseudo-command mode. When a
data comes from Network and G24 is in pseudo-command mode, a special unsolicited event
(+MIPDATA) is being sent to terminal (see “+MIPDATA, Network Incoming Data Unsolicited
Indication in Pseudo-command Mode” on page 3-401).
When socket is in Online Data Mode (not in pseudo-command mode), RS232 communication
DCD line is enabled.
There are two options to suspend a socket, opened in Online Data Mode, when G24 is in
PREMUX state:
• Enter ESC sequence from terminal.

• Disable DTR line on RS232 communication port in case of AT&D1 parameter configuration.

1-8

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 1: Product Features

There are two options for valid closing of a socket, opened in Online Data Mode, when G24 is in
PREMUX state:
• Switch G24 to pseudo-command mode and enter +MIPCLOSE command with opened in
Online Data Mode Socket ID.
• Disable DTR line on RS232 communication port in case of A&D2 or AT&D3 parameter
configuration.
When G24 is in MUX state, change of DTR or software DTR state on ODM MUX channel closes
ODM session in case of A&D1, A&D2 or AT&D3.
When an error occurred with the socket, opened in Online Data Mode, the socket closes
automatically and +MIPSTAT unsolicited response is being sent to terminal (see “+MIPSTAT,
Status Report” on page 3-400).

SSL
General Description
SSL (Secure Socket Layer) and its successor TLS (Transport Layer Security) are cryptographic
protocols which provide endpoint authentication and communication privacy over the TCP / IP.
There are slight differences between SSL 3.0 and TLS 1.0, but the protocol remains substantially
the same. The term "SSL" as used here applies to both protocols unless clarified by context.

Cipher Suite
Cipher Suite is a set of cryptographic algorithms. A cipher suite specifies one algorithm for each
of the following tasks: Key exchange, Bulk encryption and Message authentication. For example,
Cipher Suite TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5 specifies RSA as key exchange algorithm, RC4
with key length 128 bit as a stream cipher algorithm, to encrypt data transfer after handshake, and
MD5 as algorithm for SSL message authentication.
The G24 SSL feature supports the following Cipher Suites (listed in order of the preference):
• TLS_RSA_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA

•
•
•
•
•

TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_MD5
TLS_RSA_WITH_RC4_128_SHA
TLS_RSA_EXPORT_WITH_RC4_40_MD5
TLS_DHE_DSS_WITH_3DES_EDE_CBC_SHA
TLS_RSA_WITH_NULL_MD5

Certificate expiration time
In order to check if SSL Certificate has expired, G24 uses internal clock. Some cellular operators
support automatic time synchronization, so the G24 internal clock synchronizes automatically. In
case the cellular operator does not support such feature, user should manually set G24 internal
clock using +CCLK AT command. Since the clock is reset when the power to G24 is cut, the
current time should be updated after G24 is powered up.

Features and Benefits
The TCP/UDP IP feature provides the terminal with the following benefits:

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

1-9

Improved OEM Features

• Up to four simultaneous protocol connections.
• Ability to pass data via the protocol stack using AT commands (command mode). This
relieves the terminal from switching the RS232 to "binary mode" and back to "command
mode".
• Ability to use UDP and TCP simultaneously.

• No need for protocol support from the terminal - only data sending and receiving.
• Reduced memory utilization. The G24 manages the protocol stack and therefore saves
terminal memory.
• Ability to open TCP connections, secured with SSL/TLS.

• Ability to receive the incoming TCP connections.
• Ability to accept IP connections only if the IP belongs to a defined IP white list.

Technical Description
Figure 1-1, “System Overview,” on page 1-5 displays the system overview which comprises the
following links and layers:
Physical layer links:
• The terminal is connected to the G24 using a physical RS-232 connection.

• The G24 is connected to the GGSN using a GPRS link.
• The GGSN is connected to the Internet via some sort of physical connection (usually
telephone or cable).
Point-to-point layer links:
• AT command protocol is used to transfer data between the terminal and the G24.

• After authentication, the G24 is linked to the GGSN using PPP protocol.
• The GGSN is connected to its Internet service provider using some protocol.
TCP / UDP layer:
• The G24 can transfer data with the WEB using either TCP/IP or UDP/IP protocols.

• The protocol stacks in the terminal or in the OEM must be managed when using TCP/IP or
UDP/IP protocols. The G24 software can manage these stacks internally. This enables the
G24 to relieve the terminal from the job of managing these protocols.
Note: Currently, the embedded TCP/IP feature may be used only for mobile-initiated

connections. The embedded. TCP/IP feature cannot listen on a port for incoming
connections.

Audio
Overview
The audio (digital and analog) feature in the G24 module involves three main issues: path (routes
the current input and output devices), gain (volume management) and algorithm. For more
information, refer to “Audio” on page 3-229.

1-10

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 1: Product Features

Features and Benefits
The following algorithm related features are provided:

Sidetone
Sidetone reduces the microphone audio input that is routed to the selected speaker so that the
person speaking can hear himself or herself talking. This creates a slight echo because the speaker
sound then gets picked up again by the microphone and is again routed to the speaker, and so on.
Echo suppress is designed to take care of this echo.
Spkr

Mic

2

1

Figure 1-2: Sidetone

Echo Suppression
Echo suppression suppresses a large amount of the output sound picked up by the input device
(cancels all echoes).
G24

Remote
Spkr

5

Mic

1

2

Spkr

3

Mic

4

Out

Out line is filtered
by In line

In

Echo
Suppression

1

Solution
2

3

4

5

4

(

3

1

(

Problem

Loop

Figure 1-3: Echo Suppression

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

1-11

Improved OEM Features

Noise Suppress
Noise suppression improves audio quality in all modes by suppressing environment noise from
being picked up by the input device.

Technical Description
The path features provide full control over the navigation of the audio in the product.
The gain features provide full control over the volume levels of the different output accessories
and tones.
The algorithm provides full control over activation/deactivation of audio quality features such as
echo canceling and noise suppression.
The user can access these features by means of AT commands. These are described later in this
document.

1-12

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 1: Product Features

MUX Integration
Overview
The G24 is supplied with an internal GSM 7.10 protocol stack, also referred to as a multiplexer or
MUX.
The G24 with multiplexer support utility provides the following capabilities:
• Provides the terminal with up to five virtual channels on one physical RS-232 connection.

• Provides simultaneous data (CSD/GPRS) and command (AT command set) services. In this
way, many applications can use a single RS232 line via virtual channels. This enables a user
to make network and phone service inquiries and maintain data communication at the same
time.
These capabilities are illustrated in the following figure:

G 24

Figure 1-4: G24 with Multiplexer Support Capabilities

Features and Benefits
The G24 with the MUX feature ENABLES multiple channel operation and simultaneous data and
control operation. For example, it allows a user to be connected to an Internet website (GPRS
session connected), receive a file via CSD Call, and query the G24 phone book all at the same
time.
The following actions are enabled during a data session:
• Incoming call alert string RING (while G24 is in GPRS session)

• Answering to incoming call via the ATA command (while G24 is in GPRS session)

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

1-13

MUX Integration

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Receive Incoming SMS indication
Inquiry GSM coverage indication
Setup a voice call (while G24 is in GPRS session)
Send & Receive SMS
Read/write to/from Phone Book
Local modem operation
Network interrogation and settings

Technical Description
The MUX feature adds five virtual channels on a single physical RS232 line:
• Channel #0 - DLC0 for MUX Control

• Channels #1 through #4 are used for Data/Fax, GPRS, Voice call and control, and
Logger/External modem applications

1-14

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 1: Product Features

Short Message Service (SMS)
Overview
The SMS feature provides means for SMS messages handling and the reporting of SMS reception
events.
G24 SMS implementation is based on the GSM 07.05 specification.

Features
The SMS, as defined within the GSM 900/1800/1900 digital mobile phone standard:
• A single short message can be up to 160 characters of ASCII text in length (7-bit coded).
Message text can comprise words, numbers or an alphanumeric combination.
• Short messages can be written and displayed in various coding schemes, including ASCII
and UCS2.
• Reception of an incoming message can invoke an indication to the terminal. This feature is
configurable using the command AT+CNMI. Short messages received during data calls are
not indicated.
• Short messages can be sent and received simultaneously with GSM voice, data and fax calls.

• Cell broadcast messages can also be selected and received on the G24. The G24 enables
registration to specific broadcast channels.

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

1-15

Short Message Service (SMS)

Technical Description
The G24 memory for incoming short messages is SIM-dependent. A new incoming message is
saved in the first free memory location, from index 1, according to the SIM card.
The G24 memory can contain up to 73 outgoing and CB messages. A new outgoing message is
saved in the next free memory location, from index 101 up to index 352.

SMS Type
Incoming messages

SMS Index
1

Max Number of SMS
SIM-dependent

2
...
30
Future use

31

N/A

...
100
Outgoing and CB
messages

101

73

102
...
352

1-16

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 1: Product Features

Email Message Services
Overview
The Email feature is intended for Email messages handling: send, receive, read, list and delete. It
is also intended for email account setup. See Figure 1-5 for general concept.
POP3 Email
server

Figure 1-5: Email Server Connection Overview

Features
• Sending and receiving emails can be done only when account setup is fully completed using
+MEMISP and +MEMAS.
• Sending and receiving emails can be done only when GPRS connection service is available.

• A single email message can contain up to 3000 characters of ASCII text in length (7-bit
coded).
• Message body can comprise words, numbers or an alphanumeric combination.

• Number of emails in Email storage is limited by the phone memory available size only and
not by number of emails.

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

1-17

Fax

Fax
Overview
A Service Class 1 facsimile G24 provides a basic level of services necessary to support Group 3
facsimile operation. This requires support from the facsimile terminal to implement the
recommended T.30 procedures for document facsimile transmission and recommended T.4 for
representing facsimile images.

Features and Benefits
Sending and receiving Fax services.

Technical Description
Service Class 1 includes the following services, as required or optional in Group 3 facsimile:
• Connection

•
•
•
•

1-18

Waiting and silence detection
Data transmission and reception
HDLC data framing, transparency and error detection
Message generation

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 1: Product Features

Character Sets
The following includes the references to various tables that provide conversions between the
different character sets.
• CS1 - GSM to UCS2.

• CS2 - ASCII to/from UTF8.
• CS3 - UCS2 to/from UTF8.
For the full content of a specific conversion table, refer to Appendix A, Character Set Tables.

ASCII Character Set Management
The ASCII character set is a standard seven-bit code that was proposed by ANSI in 1963, and
finalized in 1968. ASCII was established to achieve compatibility between various types of data
processing equipment.

GSM Character Set Management
In G24, the GSM character set is defined as octant stream. This means that text is displayed not as
GSM characters but in the hex values of these characters.

UCS2 Character Set Management
UCS2 is the first officially standardized coded character set, eventually to include the characters
of all the written languages in the world, as well as all mathematical and other symbols.
Unicode can be characterized as the (restricted) 2-octet form of UCS2 on (the most general)
implementation level 3, with the addition of a more precise specification of the bi-directional
behavior of characters, as used in the Arabic and Hebrew scripts.
The 65,536 positions in the 2-octet form of UCS2 are divided into 256 rows with 256 cells in
each. The first octet of a character representation denotes the row number, the second the cell
number. The first row (row 0) contains exactly the same characters as ISO/IEC 8859-1. The first
128 characters are thus the ASCII characters. The octet representing an ISO/IEC 8859-1 character
is easily transformed to the representation in UCS2 by placing a 0 octet in front of it. UCS2
includes the same control characters as ISO/IEC 8859 (also in row 0).

UTF-8 Character Set Management
UTF-8 provides compact, efficient Unicode encoding. The encoding distributes a Unicode code
value's bit pattern across one, two, three, or even four bytes. This encoding is a multi-byte
encoding.
UTF-8 encodes ASCII in a single byte, meaning that languages using Latin-based scripts can be
represented with only 1.1 bytes per character on average.
UTF-8 is useful for legacy systems that want Unicode support because developers do not have to
drastically modify text processing code. Code that assumes single-byte code units typically does
not fail completely when provided UTF-8 text instead of ASCII or even Latin-1.

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

1-19

Character Sets

Unlike some legacy encoding, UTF-8 is easy to parse. So-called lead and trail bytes are easily
distinguished. Moving forwards or backwards in a text string is easier in UTF-8 than in many
other multi-byte encoding.
The codes in the first half of the first row in Character Set Table CS2 (UTF-8 <-> ASCII) are
replaced in this transformation format by their ASCII codes, which are octets in the range
between 00h and 7F. The other UCS2 codes are transformed to between two and six octets in the
range between 80h and FF. Text containing only characters in Character Set Table CS3
(UTF-8 <-> UCS-2) is transformed to the same octet sequence, irrespective of whether it was
coded with UCS-2.

8859-1 Character Set Management
ISO-8859-1 is an 8 bit character set - a major improvement over the plain 7 bit US-ASCII.
Characters 0 to 127 are always identical with US-ASCII and the positions 128 to 159 hold some
less used control characters. Positions 160 to 255 hold language-specific characters.
ISO-8859-1 covers most West European languages, such as French (fr), Spanish (es), Catalan
(ca), Basque (eu), Portuguese (pt), Italian (it), Albanian (sq), Rhaeto-Romanic (rm), Dutch (nl),
German (de), Danish (da), Swedish (sv), Norwegian (no), Finnish (fi), Faroese (fo), Icelandic (is),
Irish (ga), Scottish (gd) and English (en). Afrikaans (af) and Swahili (sw) are also included,
extending coverage to much of Africa.

1-20

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 1: Product Features

AT Commands Summary
The following list contains a summary of all the G24 AT commands sorted by functionality.
Table 1-1: AT Commands
AT Command

Description

Page

Modem ID
Subscriber Unit Identity
+CGMI

This command displays manufacturer identification.

Page 3-1

+GMI

This command displays manufacturer identification.

Page 3-1

+FMI

This command displays manufacturer identification.

Page 3-1

+CGMM

This command displays the model identification.

Page 3-2

+GMM

This command displays the model identification.

Page 3-2

+FMM

This command displays the model identification.

Page 3-2

+CGMR

This command displays the revision identification.

Page 3-3

+GMR

This command displays the revision identification.

Page 3-3

+FMR

This command displays the revision identification.

Page 3-3

+CGSN

This command displays the product serial number identification.

Page 3-3

+GSN

This command requests the product serial number identification.

Page 3-3

+CSCS

This command selects the G24 character set.

Page 3-4

+CIMI

This command displays the International Mobile Subscriber Identity
number.

Page 3-6

+CFSN

This command displays the factory serial number.

Page 3-6

I

This command displays various G24 information items.

Page 3-6

+CNUM

This command displays up to five strings of text information that
identify the G24.

Page 3-7

$

This command displays a list of all the AT commands supported by
the G24.

Page 3-8

+CLAC

This command displays a list of all the AT commands supported by
the G24.

Page 3-9

Call Control
Call Control Commands
D

This command places a voice call on the current network, when
issued from an accessory device.

Page 3-13

D>

This command places a voice/fax/data call on the current network
by dialing directly from the G24 phone book.

Page 3-14

DL

This command places a voice call to the last number dialed.

Page 3-16

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

1-21

AT Commands Summary

Table 1-1: AT Commands (Cont.)
AT Command

1-22

Description

Page

H

This command hangs up, or terminates a particular call.

Page 3-17

A

This command answers an incoming call, placing the G24 into the
appropriate mode, as indicated by the RING message.

Page 3-19

+CRC

This command controls whether to present the extended format of
the incoming call indication.

Page 3-19

RING

This unsolicited event is received when an incoming call (voice,
data or fax) is indicated by the cellular network.

Page 3-19

+CRING

This unsolicited event indicates the type of incoming call.

Page 3-19

+CLIP

This command controls the Calling Line Identity (CLI) presentation
to the terminal when there is an incoming call.

Page 3-21

+CCWA

This command controls the Call Waiting supplementary service,
including settings and querying of the network by the G24.

Page 3-23

+CHLD

This command controls the Call Hold and Multiparty Conversation
supplementary services.

Page 3-25

+CCFC

This command controls the call-forwarding supplementary service.

Page 3-29

+CLIR

This command enables/disables the sending of caller ID information
to the called party, for an outgoing call.

Page 3-31

+CBST

This command handles the selection of the bearer service and the
connection element to be used when data calls are originated.

Page 3-33

O

This command returns a phone to the Online Data mode and issues a
CONNECT or CONNECT  result code.

Page 3-34

+CHUP

This command causes the G24 to hang up the current GSM call.

Page 3-35

+CSNS

This command handles the selection of the bearer or teleservice to
be used when a mobile terminated single numbering scheme call is
established.

Page 3-36

+MDC

This command enables you to select the desired messages to be
displayed upon connection of a voice call with a remote party.

Page 3-38

+CTFR1

This command terminates an incoming call and diverts the caller to
the number previously defined in CCFC, or to a voice mail if one
exists for the subscriber.

Page 3-39

+MCST

This command displays the current state of the call processing, and
also enables/disables the unsolicited indication of any change in the
call processing state.

Page 3-49

+TCLCC

This command displays a list of all current G24 calls and their
statuses, and also enables/disables the unsolicited indication of the
call list.

Page 3-51

+MNTFY

This command enables/disables unsolicited report of NOTIFY
indication arrived from the NW.

Page 3-53

+MFIC

This command instructs the G24 to query or set Filtering
Incoming Calls parameters.

Page 3-40

+MHUP

This command Hung UP call(s) and report specific cause to the NW. Page 3-42

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 1: Product Features

Table 1-1: AT Commands (Cont.)
AT Command

Description

Page

+MVC

This AT command is used to choose and configure the
priority order of the supported voice codecs (vocoders).

Page 3-43

+MTTY

This command is used to enable/disable the TTY (Tele Typewriter)
support in the G24.

Page 3-44

Call Status Messages
+CPAS

This command displays the current activity status of the G24, for
example, call in progress, or ringing.

Page 3-46

+CLCC

This command displays a list of all current G24 calls and their
statuses, and also enables/disables the unsolicited indication of the
call list.

Page 3-47

Call Advice of Charge Messages
+CAOC

This command displays information about the cost of calls.

Page 3-55

+CACM

This command resets the Advice of Charge accumulated call meter
value in the SIM file, EFACM.

Page 3-57

+CAMM

This command sets the Advice of Charge accumulated call meter
maximum value in the SIM file, EFACMmax.

Page 3-58

+CPUC

This command sets the parameters of the Advice of Charge-related
price per unit and currency table found in the SIM file, EFPUCT.

Page 3-60

+CR

This command controls whether or not the extended format of an
outgoing call is displayed or not.

Page 3-61

Supplementary Services
+CSSN

This command handles the enabling and disabling of supplementary
service-related, network-initiated, notifications.

Page 3-62

+CUSD

This command allows control of Unstructured Supplementary
Service Data (USSD), according to GSM 02.90.

Page 3-65

+COLP

This command refers to the GSM supplementary service COLP,
Connected Line Identification Presentation, which enables a calling
subscriber to get the connected line identity (COL) of the called
party after setting up a mobile-originated call.

Page 3-69

Phone and Date Books
Directory Access Commands
+CPBS

This command handles the selection of the memory to be used for
reading and writing entries in G24s that contain more than one
phone book memory.

Page 3-71

+CPBR

This command recalls phone book entries from a specific entry
number, or from a range of entries.

Page 3-73

+MCSN

This command sets EFmsisdn in the SIM.

Page 3-81

+MDSI

This command enables unsolicited reporting of indications of SIM
deactivation and invalidation.

Page 3-78

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

1-23

AT Commands Summary

Table 1-1: AT Commands (Cont.)
AT Command

Description

Page

+CPBF

This command searches the currently active phone book for a
particular entry, by name.

Page 3-75

+CPBW

This command stores a new entry in the phone book, or deletes an
existing entry from the phone book.

Page 3-76

+CSVM

This command handles the selection of the number to the voice mail
server.

Page 3-77

+MPDPM

This command returns the collective percentage of memory used by
the phonebook and datebook in their shared dynamic memory
storage.

Page 3-85

Directory Access Commands - Date Book
+MALARM

This unsolicited event is sent to the terminal indicating a reminder is
activated.

Page 3-86

+MALMH

This command terminates the current reminder.

Page 3-87

+MDBGD

This command sets general definitions for date book.

Page 3-88

+MDBR

This command recalls date book entries from a specific entry
number, or from a range of entries.

Page 3-89

+MDBW

This command stores a new entry in the phone book, or updates an
existing entry from the date book.

Page 3-91

+MDBWE

This command deletes an existing entry from date book and adds or
deletes exception instance of an existing entry from date book.

Page 3-93

System Date and Time Access Commands
+CCLK

This command reads/sets the G24's current date and time settings.

Page 3-96

+CSMS

This command handles the selection of the SMS message service
type.

Page 3-98

+CPMS

This command handles the selection of the preferred storage area for
messages.

Page 3-99

+CMGF

This command handles the selection of message formats.

Page 3-101

+CSCA

This command handles the selection of the SCA and the TOSCA.

Page 3-101

+CSMP

This command sets the Text Module parameters.

Page 3-104

+CSDH

This command shows the Text Mode parameters.

Page 3-106

+CNMI

This command sends an unsolicited indication when a new SMS
message is received by the G24.

Page 3-107

+CNMA

This command acknowledges the receipt of a +CMT response.

Page 3-108

+CMTI

This unsolicited message, including the SMS message index, is sent
upon the arrival of an SMS message.

Page 3-110

SMS
SMS Commands

1-24

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 1: Product Features

Table 1-1: AT Commands (Cont.)
AT Command

Description

Page

+CMGL

This command displays a list of SMS messages stored in the G24
memory.

Page 3-114

+MMGL

This command displays a list of SMS messages stored in the G24
memory.

Page 3-114

+CMGR

This command reads selected SMS messages from the G24
memory.

Page 3-118

+MMGR

This command reads selected SMS messages from the G24
memory.

Page 3-118

+MMAR

This command changes the status of an SMS message in the G24
memory from "REC UNREAD" to "REC READ".

Page 3-125

+CMSS

This command selects and sends pre-stored messages from the
message storage.

Page 3-125

+CMGW

This command writes and saves messages in the G24 memory.

Page 3-127

+CMGD

This command deletes messages from the G24 memory.

Page 3-132

+CGSMS

This command handles the selection of the service or service
preference used by the G24 to send mobile-originated SMS
messages.

Page 3-133

+CMGS

This command sends an SM from the G24 to the network.

Page 3-134

+CSCB

This command handles the selection of cell broadcast message types
and data coding schemes received by the G24.

Page 3-135

+CMT

This unsolicited message forwards the SMS upon its arrival.

Page 3-108

+CBM

This unsolicited message forwards the SMS upon its arrival.

Page 3-108

+MCSAT

This command enables/disables/exercises SMS alert tone for an
arriving SMS.

Page 3-137

+MEGA

This command updates the Email Gateway Address.

Page 3-141

+TSMSRET

This command controls the SMS sending retry.

Page 3-142

+MRICS

This command allows configuring the behavior of RI line in a case
of SMS arrival.

Page 3-142

Email
Email Commands
+MEMAS

This command is used for Email account settings.

Page 3-150

+MEMD

This command is used to delete an Email message.

Page 3-163

+MEMDE

This command is used to download an Email message.

Page 3-154

+MEMISP

This command is used for Email account ISP settings.

Page 3-149

+MEMGS

This command is used for Email account general settings.

Page 3-152

+MEML

This command is used to list Email messages.

Page 3-159

+MEMSE

This command is used to send an Email message.

Page 3-156

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

1-25

AT Commands Summary

Table 1-1: AT Commands (Cont.)
AT Command

Description

Page

+MEMR

This command is used to read an Email message.

Page 3-162

+MEMW

This command is used to write or update an Email message.

Page 3-165

Network
Network Commands
+CSQ

This command displays the signal strength received by the G24.

Page 3-167

+CRLP

This command displays the Radio Link Protocol parameters.

Page 3-168

+CREG

This command enables/disables the network status registration
unsolicited result code.

Page 3-169

+CGREG

This command enables/disables the GPRS network status
registration unsolicited result code.

Page 3-171

+COPS

This command enables accessing the network registration
information, as well as select and register the GSM network
operator.

Page 3-172

+CPOL

This command is used to edit the list of preferred operators located
in the SIM card.

Page 3-175

+MFS

This command is used to determine how long the G24 waits before
attempting to re-register after a registration attempt has failed and
the G24 is not registered.

Page 3-177

+MCELL

This command displays information about the Cellular Network.

Page 3-179

Hardware Information
Hardware Information Commands

1-26

+CBC

This command queries the battery charger connection.

Page 3-193

+CBAUD

This command sets the baud rate.

Page 3-194

+IPR

This command is responsible for setting and saving the request baud
rate.

Page 3-195

+GCAP

This command displays the overall capabilities of the G24.

Page 3-197

+CBAND

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-280

+MTDTR

This command checks and displays the physical current status of the
DTR pin of the RS232.

Page 3-197

+MTCTS

This command sets the CTS pin of the RS232 to not active (high),
waits one second and then sets the CTS to active (low).

Page 3-198

&K

This command configures the RTS/CTS flow control.

Page 3-198

&C

This command determines how the state of the DCD line relates to
the detection of the received line signal from the distant end.

Page 3-199

&D

This command determines how the G24 responds when the DTR
(Data Terminal Ready) status is changed from ON to OFF during
the online data state.

Page 3-201

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 1: Product Features

Table 1-1: AT Commands (Cont.)
AT Command

Description

Page

+MCWAKE

This command displays reports on the status of the GPRS/GSM
coverage.

Page 3-202

+MGGIND

This command configures the service indicator on pin 49 of the 70
pin connector to be GPRS or GSM.

Page 3-203

+CFUN

This command shuts down the phone functionality of smart phones
and PDAs with phone capabilities.

Page 3-204

+ICF

This command determines the local serial port start/stop
(asynchronous) character framing used by the DCE when accepting
DTE commands and transmitting information text and result codes.

Page 3-205

S97

This command indicates whether an antenna is physically connected
to the G24 RF connector.

Page 3-206

+MRST

This command enables customer software to perform a hard reset to
the G24 unit.

Page 3-207

+TWUS

This command is used to set the wakeup reason(s).

Page 3-207

+TWUR

This command is used to query the wakeup reason(s).

Page 3-209

+TASW

This command controls the antenna switch mechanism.

Page 3-209

+TADIAG

This command queries actual ADC values of the antennas.

Page 3-210

READY

This unsolicited notification indicates UART is ready.

Page 3-211

+MPSU

This command defines the functionality of the second physical
UART.

Page 3-211

+MIOC

This command defines the G24 8 GPIO pins data value.

Page 3-213

+MIOD

This command defines the G24 8 GPIO pins configuration.

Page 3-217

+MMAD

This command reads and monitors digital value from a specified
ADC.

Page 3-219

+MPCMC

This command defines whether the PCM clock is generated
continuously or not, when module is in digital audio mode.

Page 3-226

+MVREF

This command defines the behavior of Vref regulator.

Page 3-227

Audio
General Audio Setup Commands
+CRTT

This command plays one cycle of a ring tone, stops the cycle in the
middle, and sets the ring tone to be used.

Page 3-247

+VTD

This command handles the selection of tone duration.

Page 3-250

+VTS

This command transmits a string of DTMF tones when a voice call
is active.

Page 3-251

+CALM

This command handles the selection of the G24’s alert sound mode.

Page 3-245

+MDMIC

This command enables/disables the setting of microphone gain
values by +MMICG in digital audio mode.

Page 3-246

+MMICG

This command handles the selection of microphone gain values.

Page 3-246

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

1-27

AT Commands Summary

Table 1-1: AT Commands (Cont.)
AT Command
+MADIGITAL

Description

Page

This command switches between analog and digital audio modes.

Page 3-244

Basic Audio Specific Commands
S94

This S-parameter represents the Boolean status, On/Off, of the
sidetone feature.

Page 3-235

S96

This S-parameter represents the Boolean status, On/Off, of the echo
cancelling feature in the handsfree.

Page 3-236

+CRSL

This command handles the selection of the incoming call ringer and
alert tone (SMS) sound level on the alert speaker of the G24.

Page 3-232

+CLVL

This command sets the volume of the internal loudspeaker (which
also affects the key feedback tone) of the G24.

Page 3-233

+CMUT

This command mutes/unmutes the currently active microphone path
by overriding the current mute state.

Page 3-234

+MEDT

This command enables/disables the G24 tones.

Page 3-139

Advanced Audio Setup Commands
+MAPATH

This command sets/requests the active input accessory, and the
output accessory for each feature.

Page 3-237

+MAVOL

This command determines a volume setting for a particular feature
in a particular accessory.

Page 3-240

+MAFEAT

This command controls the various algorithm features, such as
sidetone, echo cancel and noise suppress.

Page 3-243

+MAMUT

This command controls the muting/unmuting of all input paths
(MIC, HDST_MIC, DIGITAL_RX).

Page 3-242

Access
Access Control Commands
A/

This command repeats the last command entered on the terminal.

Page 3-252

AT

This command checks the AT communication and only returns OK.

Page 3-252

+CPIN

This command is only relevant for phones that use SIM cards. It
unlocks the SIM card when the proper SIM PIN is provided, and
unblocks the SIM card when the proper SIM PUK is provided.

Page 3-253

+EPIN

This command is only relevant for phones that use SIM cards. It
verifies the PIN2 indicator.

Page 3-256

+TPIN

This command queries the number of remaining SIM PIN/PUK
entering attempts.

Page 3-257

+CPWD

This command sets a new password for the facility lock.

Page 3-258

+CLCK

This command locks, unlocks or interrogates a G24 or a network
facility .

Page 3-259

+EMPC

This command unlocks or resets the first PLMN of the
inserted SIM.

Page 3-262

FOTA Commands
1-28

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 1: Product Features

Table 1-1: AT Commands (Cont.)
AT Command

Description

Page

+MFOTAWSCF
G

This command sets the Web-Session default entry.

Page 3-265

+MFOTACNFG

This command enables setting the DM session as
Automatic/Non-Automatic (i.e. Transparent/Non-Transparent).

Page 3-266

+MFOTAREQ

This command sends FOTA requests toward DTE.

Page 3-268

+MFOTARSP

This command is used to send response to +MFOTAREQ reports.

Page 3-269

+MFOTAINSTL

Installs the updated package.

Page 3-270

+MFOTAABOR
T

Aborts the DM session.

Page 3-270

+MFOTAIND

This command sends Unsolicited FOTA indications toward DTE.

Page 3-271

Modem Configuration and Profile
Modem Register Commands
V

This command determines the response format of the data adapter
and the contents of the header and trailer transmitted with the result
codes and information responses.

Page 3-273

Q

This command determines whether to output/suppress the result
codes.

Page 3-274

E

This command defines whether the G24 echoes the characters
received from the user, (whether input characters are echoed to
output).

Page 3-275

X

This command defines the data adaptor response set, and the
CONNECT result code format.

Page 3-276

Sn

This command reads/writes values of the S-registers, and includes
registers 1-49, 94, 96 (Audio) and 102 (Sleep mode).

Page 3-277

\S

This command displays the status of selected commands and
S-registers.

Page 3-280

\G

This command sets the use of the software flow control.

Page 3-280

\J

This command adjusts the terminal auto rate.

Page 3-280

\N

This command displays the type of link.

Page 3-280

?

This command displays the most recently updated value stored in
the S-register.

Page 3-281

&F

This command restores the factory default configuration profile.

Page 3-281

Z

This command resets the default configuration.

Page 3-282

Sleep Mode Commands
S24

December 31, 2007

This S-parameter activates/disables the Sleep mode. If the parameter
value is greater than 0, it represent the number of seconds till the
G24 enters sleep mode.

AT Commands Reference Manual

Page 3-285

1-29

AT Commands Summary

Table 1-1: AT Commands (Cont.)
AT Command

Description

Page

S102

This S-register sets the value of the delay before sending the data to
the terminal.

Page 3-286

+MSCTS

This command defines the behavior of the CTS line when the G24 is
in Sleep mode.

Page 3-288

Error Handling Commands
+CMEE

This command enables/disables the use of result code +CME
ERROR:  as an indication of an error relating to the
functionality of the G24.

Page 3-289

+CEER

This command returns an extended error report containing one or
more lines of information text, determined by the manufacturer,
providing the reasons for the
call-clearing errors.

Page 3-296

+MGEER

This command returns the PDP context activation reject cause.

Page 3-299

RS232 Multiplexer Commands
+CMUX

This command is used to enable/disable the GSM MUX
multiplexing protocol stack.

Page 3-438

+CRSM

This command provides limited access to the Elementary Files on
the SIM.

Page 3-302

&V

This command displays the current active configuration and stored
user profiles.

Page 3-307

&W

This command stores the user profile.

Page 3-308

&Y

This command displays the default user profile.

Page 3-310

+CKPD

This command emulates key presses, or virtual keycodes, as if
entered from the G24 keypad or from a remote handset.

Page 3-310

+MKPD

This command enables accessories to control the press and release
of key presses.

Page 3-312

+CMER

This command enables an external accessory to receive key press
information from the G24’s internal keypad.

Page 3-314

+CLAN

This command handles the selection of language in the ME.

Page 3-315

+CIND

This command is used to query the status of various ME indicators.

Page 3-316

+MHDPB

This command is used to enable and disable the SEND/END
functionality of the headset dual-position button.

Page 3-318

User Interface

Unsolicited UI Status Messages

1-30

+CKEV

This command causes the G24 to send an unsolicited message when
a key is pressed on the G24 keypad, and local key press echo is
enabled.

Page 3-320

+MUPB

This command causes the G24 to send an event when a phone book
entry is accessed or modified by the user.

Page 3-322

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 1: Product Features

Table 1-1: AT Commands (Cont.)
AT Command

Description

Page

+CDEV

An unsolicited indication regarding display changes that is sent to
the DTE when the  parameter of the +CMER command is set
to 1.

Page 3-321

+CIEV

An unsolicited indication regarding various phone indications that is
sent to the DTE when the  parameter of the +CMER command
is set to 1.

Page 3-321

GPRS
GPRS Commands
+CGCLASS

This command sets the GPRS mobile station class.

Page 3-324

+CGDCONT

This command specifies the PDP (Packet Data Protocol) context.

Page 3-325

+CGQMIN

This command sets the minimum acceptable quality of service
profile.

Page 3-327

+CGQREQ

This command displays the requested quality of service profile.

Page 3-329

+CGACT

This command activates/deactivates the PDP Context.

Page 3-330

+CGPADDR

This command reads the allocated PDP addresses for the specified
context identifiers.

Page 3-336

+CGATT

This command attaches the G24 to the GPRS network.

Page 3-330

D*99

This command enables the ME to perform the actions necessary for
establishing communication between the terminal and the external
PDN.

Page 3-332

+CGPRS

This command indicates whether there is GPRS coverage.

Page 3-334

+MDLC

This command establishes PPP link over serial port.

Page 3-337

+MIAU

This command manages IP Director addresses and port.

Page 3-338

EDGE Commands
+CGEQREQ

This command allows the TE to specify a EDGE Quality of Service
Profile that is used when the MT sends an Activate PDP Context
Request message to the network.

Page 3-340

+CGEQMIN

This command allows the TE to specify a minimum acceptable
profile, which is checked by the MT against the negotiated profile
returned in the Activate/Modify PDP Context Accept message.

Page 3-346

+CGEQNEG

This command allows the TE to retrieve the negotiated QoS profiles
returned in the Activate PDP Context Accept message.

Page 3-352

+MCEG

This command disables / enables EDGE support in G24 modules
with EDGE support capability.

Page 3-356

+MTKR

This command displays the profile that is downloaded from the G24
to the SIM during the SIM initialization process.

Page 3-358

+MTKE

This command enables/disables the SIM ToolKit functionalities.

Page 3-367

STK Commands

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

1-31

AT Commands Summary

Table 1-1: AT Commands (Cont.)
AT Command

Description

Page

+MTKP

This is both a command and an unsolicited event. The command
responds to an unsolicited event.

Page 3-368

+MTKM

This is both a command and an unsolicited event. The command
selects items from the menu.

Page 3-383

+MTKC

This unsolicited event notifies the terminal when supplementary
services, SMS Control or Call Control are modified.

Page 3-385

TCP/IP Commands

1-32

+MIPCALL

This command creates a wireless PPP connection with the GGSN,
and returns a valid dynamic IP for the G24.

Page 3-386

+MIPOPEN

This command causes the G24 module to initialize a new socket and
open a connection with a remote side.

Page 3-387

+MIPODM

This command causes the G24 module to initialize a new socket in
Online Data Mode and open a connection with a remote side.

Page 3-389

+MIPCLOSE

This command causes the G24 module to free the socket
accumulating buffer and disconnect the G24 from a remote side.

Page 3-392

+MIPSETS

This command causes the G24 to set a watermark in the
accumulating buffer. When the watermark is reached, data is pushed
from the accumulating buffer into the protocol stack.

Page 3-394

+MIPSEND

This command causes the G24 to transmit the data that the terminal
provides, using an existing protocol stack.

Page 3-395

+MIPPUSH

This command causes the G24 module to push the data accumulated
in its accumulating buffers into the protocol stack.

Page 3-397

+MIPFLUSH

This command causes the G24 module to flush (delete) data
accumulated in its accumulating buffers.

Page 3-398

+MIPRUDP

This unsolicited event is sent to the terminal when data is received
from the UDP protocol stack.

Page 3-399

+MIPRTCP

This unsolicited event is sent to the terminal when data is received
from the TCP protocol stack.

Page 3-399

+MIPSTAT

This unsolicited event is sent to the terminal indicating a change in
link status.

Page 3-400

+MIPDATA

This unsolicited event is sent to the terminal indicating a data
comes from Network when G24 is in pseudo-command
mode.

Page 3-401

+MIPXOFF

This unsolicited event is sent to the terminal to stop sending data.

Page 3-401

+MIPXON

This unsolicited event is sent to the terminal when the G24 has free
memory in the accumulating buffer.

Page 3-402

+MPING

This command will allow verifying IP connectivity to another
remote machine (computer) by sending one or more Internet Control
Message Protocol (ICMP) Echo Request messages.

Page 3-405

+MPINGSTAT

This is the unsolicited response that the G24 sends to the terminal to
inform of ping execution status update and provides summary
statistics of ping request when ping request execution is completed.

Page 3-409

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 1: Product Features

Table 1-1: AT Commands (Cont.)
AT Command

Description

Page

+MSDNS

This command set/read DNS IP address for each socket.

Page 3-412

+MIPCFF

This command allows configuring the incoming TCP connection
filtering feature parameters, such as list of allowed IP addresses or
disabling/enabling the filtering.

Page 3-417

+MIPCSC

This AT command is used to configure the SSL feature behavior in
case of non - fatal alerts.

Page 3-414

+MIPSSL

This unsolicited event is sent to the terminal indicating an errors,
warnings or alerts that occurred during SSL connection.

Page 3-419

NOP Compatible
Ignored (Compatible Only) Commands
%C

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

&G

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

&J

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

&L

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

&M

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

&P

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

&Q

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

&R

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

&S

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

&T

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

\B

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

\A

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

\K

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

F

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

L

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

1-33

AT Commands Summary

Table 1-1: AT Commands (Cont.)
AT Command

Description

Page

M

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

N

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

P

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

T

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

Y

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

+FAR

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-423

+FCL

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-423

+FDD

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-423

+FIT

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-423

+FCLASS

This command places the terminal in particular mode of operation
(data, fax, voice).

Page 3-424

+FTS

This command causes the G24 to stop any transmission.

Page 3-425

+FRS

This command causes the G24 to listen and to report back an OK
result code when the line has been silent for the specified amount of
time.

Page 3-425

+FTM

This command causes the G24 to transmit data.

Page 3-426

+FRM

This command causes the G24 to enter the receive mode.

Page 3-428

+FTH

This command causes the G24 to transmit data framed in the HDLC
protocol.

Page 3-428

+FRH

This command causes the G24 to receive HDLC framed data and
deliver the next received frame to the terminal.

Page 3-430

+IFC

This command controls the operation of the local flow control
between the terminal and the G24.

Page 3-430

+FPR

This command sets the request baud rate.

Page 3-432

Fax Class 1
Fax Commands

1-34

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 2: Introduction to AT Commands
AT Commands Overview
AT commands are sets of commands used for communication with the G24 cellular modem.
AT commands are comprised of assemblies of ASCII characters which start with the "AT" prefix
(except the commands A/ and +++). The AT prefix is derived from the word Attention, which
asks the modem to pay attention to the current request (command).
AT commands are used to request services from the G24 cellular modem, such as:
• Call services: dial, answer and hang up

• Cellular utilities: send/receive SMS
• Modem profiles: Auto Answer
• Cellular Network queries: GSM signal quality

General Symbols Used in AT Commands Description
The following syntax definitions apply in this chapter:

Syntax

December 31, 2007

Definition



Carriage return character, specified by the value of the S3-register.



Line-feed character, specified by the value of the S4-register.

<...>

Name enclosed in angle brackets is a syntax element. The brackets themselves do not
appear in the command line.

[...]

Optional sub-parameter of a command or an optional part of terminal information
response, enclosed in square brackets. The brackets themselves do not appear in the
command line. When the sub-parameter is not provided in the parameter type
commands, the new value equals its previous value. In action type commands, the
action should be performed on the basis of the recommended default setting of the
sub-parameter.

//

Denotes a comment, and should not be included in the command.

AT Commands Reference Manual

2-1

AT Commands Protocol

General System Abbreviations
The basic system configuration contains a modem and a terminal.
The G24 is the modem and may be referred to as the DCE, the phone, the mobile or the radio.
The terminal may be referred to as the DTE or the TE.

AT Commands Protocol
The figure below shows a general messaging sequence of AT commands protocol between the
terminal and the G24.
Terminal

G24
C ommand

R esponse

N

R esults C ode

Indications

M

N , ..., 0,1 = K
M , ... ,0,1 = L

Figure 2-1: AT Commands Protocol
The AT commands interface is basically a Modem Services Upon Request.
Communication (almost) always begins from the terminal side. This means that any service
should be requested from the terminal. Thus a request is called a "command".
Each command must be answered by a "results code" from the G24. The results code reports the
command status to the terminal.
Some commands may include several "Response" requests (between 0 to K) to send data back to
the terminal.
Some commands may initiate a mode in which, when specified events are generated in the G24,
"Indicator" messages are sent asynchronously. Indicators can be between 0 to L.
The G24 can echo characters received from the terminal (commands) back to the terminal.

2-2

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 2: Introduction to AT Commands

AT Commands Structure
Command Structure
An AT command line may contain one or more commands. Delimiters are used to separate the
commands from each other, according to the following structure:
Prefix

Command1

Delimiter

Command2

Delimiter

…

CommandN

Suffix

Each AT command has the "AT" prefix string.
Each AT command has the suffix .
The delimiter is either a semicolon ";" or none, meaning space (basic commands).
Each AT command has the following structure:
Token

Mode

Arguments

The following figure outlines the basic structure of an AT command line:
Command
line prefix

Extended commands are
delimited with semicolon

Command line
termination character

Read command for checking
current subparameter values

Subparameter

ATCMD1 CMD2=12; +CMD1; +CMD2=,,15; +CMD2?; +CMD2=?
Basic command
(no + prefix)

Subparameters
may be omitted
Extended command
(prefixed with +)

Test command for checking
possible subparameter values

Figure 2-2: Basic Structure of a Command Line
The following rules must be observed when issuing a command line to the modem:
• Every command line must begin with the letters AT.

• Several commands can be concatenated as one line, as long as the total line does not exceed
140 characters with semicolon characters.

• Characters:
Spaces are ignored. You can leave spaces between each command and between characters of a
command. You can also include punctuation in telephone numbers, and type commands in either
UPPERCASE or lowercase. For example, the following commands are identical:
ATDT8005551234 < Enter > or
atdt (800) 555-1234 < Enter >
Backspace  character is allowed.
• To cancel a dialing command in progress, send any ASCII character to the modem.

• To execute the command line, send the  ASCII character.
December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

2-3

AT Commands Structure

Results Code Structure
When a command is issued, the G24 responds with a message, called a "Result Code", which tells
the terminal the result of the command that was requested. Result codes can indicate, for
example, the execution status of the command or the remote modem connection status.
Result codes can be represented either as numerical codes or as verbose responses. By default, the
G24 responds with verbose response codes.
The result code has the following structure:.
Prefix

Code

Suffix

where:
The results code prefix is .
The results code suffix is .

Response and Indications Structure
The following is the information response and indications structure:
Token

Separator

Arguments

where:
The separator is ":".
The following is an example of Response and Results code:
Information Response to + CMD2=?

Also string type subparameters possible

Information Response to + CMD2?
+CMD2: 3,0,15,"GSM"
+CMD2: (0-3),(0,1),(0-12,15),("GSM","IRA")
OK

Final result code

Shows acceptable ranges of each subparameter

Figure 2-3: Response to a Command Line
If verbose responses are enabled (using the command V1) and all the commands in a command
line have been performed successfully, the result code OK is sent from
the G24 to the terminal. If numeric responses are enabled (using the command V0), the result
code 0 is sent instead.
If verbose responses are enabled (using the command V1) and sub-parameter values of a
command are not accepted by the G24 (or if the command itself is invalid or cannot be performed
for any reason), the result code ERROR is sent to the terminal and no
subsequent commands in the command line are processed. If the numeric responses are enabled
(using the command V0), the result code 4 is sent instead. The ERROR (or 4) response may
be replaced by +CME ERROR:  when the command was not processed due to an error
related to G24 operation.
2-4

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 2: Introduction to AT Commands

AT Commands Protocol & Structure Configuration
The AT commands message flow and structure may be configured by the terminal.
The G24 can be configured not to follow a command with an echo and/or results code. It can be
configured to transmit the results code in either of two ways: Verbose or Numeric. This (and
other) configurations can be set using the following commands:

Command

Description

S3=[]

Command line termination character (default setting 0x13).

S4=[]

Response formatting character (default 0x10).

S5=[]

Command line editing character (default 0x 8).

E[]

Command echo (default 0, meaning the G24 does not echo commands).

Q[]

Result code suppression (default 0, meaning the G24 transmits result
codes).

V[]

G24 response format (default 1, meaning verbose format).

X[]

Defines CONNECT result code format.

The figure below shows the flow and structure configuration commands:
ATS3=x

A T C M

D 2 = 1 2 

ATEx

A T C M

D 2 = 1 2 

ATQx

 

O K  

ATS5=x

ATVx

A T T

C M D 1 

ATS4=x

A T C M

D 1 

 

O K  

Figure 2-4: Flow and Structure Configuration Commands

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

2-5

Command Token Types

Command Token Types
Basic Syntax Command Format
The format of Basic Syntax commands (except for the D and S commands) is:
[]
where:
 is either a single character, or the "&" character (IA5 2/6) followed by a single
character.
Characters used in  are taken from the set of alphabetic characters.
 may be a string of one or more characters from "0" through "9" representing a
decimal integer value.

S-parameters
Commands that begin with the letter S constitute a special group of parameters known as
"S-parameters". These differ from other commands in important respects:
• The number following the S indicates the "parameter number" being referenced. If the
number is not recognized as a valid parameter number, an ERROR result code is issued.
• Immediately following this number, either a "?" or "=" character (IA5 3/15 or 3/13,
respectively) appears:
"?" is used to read the current value of the indicated S-parameter.
"=" is used to set the S-parameter to a new value. ""
"]
If the "=" is used, the new value to be stored in the S-parameter is specified in decimal form
following the "=".

Extended Syntax Command Format
Both actions and parameters have names, which are used in the related commands. Names always
begin with the character "+" (IA5 2/11). Following the "+", from one to sixteen (16) additional
characters appear in the command name.
All (GSM) cellular commands have the prefix "+C".
All Fax commands have the prefix "+F".
All General modem commands have the prefix "+G".
Most Motorola propriety commands have the prefix "+M".

2-6

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 2: Introduction to AT Commands

Command Argument Types
 consists of either a numeric constant or a string constant.
 consist of several  parameters separated by commas.
Example of compound_value: ,,…,

Numeric Constants
Numeric constants are expressed in decimal, hexadecimal, or binary form. In the G24, the
definition of each command specifies which form is used for values associated with that
command.

String Constants
String constants consist of a sequence of characters, bounded at the beginning and end by the
double-quote character (").

Command Mode Types
Parameter Set Command Syntax
The terminal may store a value or values in a parameter by using the SET command.
The parameter definition indicates, for each value, whether the specification of that value is
mandatory or optional. For optional values, the definition indicates the assumed (default) value if
none is specified. The assumed value may be either a previous value (that is, the value of an
omitted sub-parameter retains its previous value), or a fixed value (for example, the value of an
omitted sub-parameter is assumed to be zero). Generally, the default value for numeric
parameters is 0, and the default value for string parameters is "" (empty string).
The following syntax are used for:
• Actions that have no sub-parameters: +

• Parameters that accept a single value: +=
• Parameters that accept more than one value: +=

Parameter Read Command Syntax
The terminal can determine the current value or values stored in a parameter by using the
following syntax: +?

Parameter Test Command Syntax
The terminal can test whether a parameter is implemented in the G24, and determine the
supported values, by using the following syntax: +=?

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

2-7

Values

Values
Range of Values
When the action accepts a single numeric sub-parameter, or the parameter accepts only one
numeric value, the set of supported values may be presented in the information text as an ordered
list of values.
The following are some examples of value range indications:

Value Range

Description

(0)

Only the value 0 is supported.

(1,2,3)

The values 1, 2, and 3 are supported.

(1-3)

The values 1 through 3 are supported.

(0,4,5,6,9,11,12)

The several listed values are supported.

(0,4-6,9,11-12)

An alternative expression of the above list.

Compound Range of Values
When the action accepts more than one sub-parameter, or the parameter accepts more than one
value, the set of supported values may be presented as a list of the parenthetically enclosed value
range strings (described above), separated by commas.
For example, the information text in response to testing an action that accepts three
sub-parameters, and supports various ranges for each of them, could appear as follows:
(0),(1-3),(0,4-6,9,11-12)

Aborting Commands
Some action commands that require time to execute may be aborted while in progress. This is
explicitly noted in the description of the command. Aborting a command is accomplished by
transmitting any character from the terminal to the G24. A single character is sufficient to abort
the command in progress. To ensure that the aborting character is recognized by the G24, it
should be sent at the same rate as the preceding command line. The G24 may ignore characters
sent at other rates. When an aborting event is recognized by the G24, it terminates the command
in progress and returns an appropriate result code to the terminal, as specified for the particular
command.
When a command is aborted, this does not mean that its operation is reversed. In the case of some
network commands, when the abort signal is detected by the G24, although the command is
aborted following G24-network negotiation, the operation might be fully completed, partially
completed or not executed at all.

2-8

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 2: Introduction to AT Commands

Core AT Commands
The G24 responds to a limited commands set when the SIM card is not functioning, or not
present. These commands are referred to as the "Core AT commands".
In previous products, the Core AT commands were called "Basic AT commands". The name
"Core" differentiates between the basic AT commands format and the limited service AT
commands.
The following table lists the Core AT commands.
Table 2-1: Core AT Commands
AT Command

Description

Page

$

This command displays a list of all the AT commands supported by
the G24.

Page 3-8

%C

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

&C

This command determines how the state of the DCD line relates to
the detection of the received line signal from the distant end.

Page 3-199

&D

This command determines how the G24 responds when the DTR
(Data Terminal Ready) status is changed from ON to OFF during
the online data state.

Page 3-201

&F

This command restores the factory default configuration profile.

Page 3-281

&G

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

&J

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

&K

This command configures the RTS/CTS flow control.

Page 3-198

&L

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

&M

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

&P

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

&Q

This command selects the asynchronous mode, and has no effect.

Page 3-35

&R

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

&S

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

&T

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

&V

This command displays the current active configuration and stored
user profiles.

Page 3-307

&W

This command stores the user profile.

Page 3-308

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

2-9

Core AT Commands

Table 2-1: Core AT Commands (Cont.)
AT Command

2-10

Description

Page

&Y

This command displays the default user profile.

Page 3-310

?

This command displays the most recently updated value stored in
the S-register.

Page 3-281

\A

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

\B

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

\G

This command sets the use of the software flow control.

Page 3-280

\J

This command adjusts the terminal auto rate.

Page 3-280

\K

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

\N

This command displays the link type.

Page 3-280

\S

This command displays the status of selected commands and
S-registers.

Page 3-280

+CBAUD

This command sets the baud rate.

Page 3-194

+CEER

This command returns an extended error report containing one or
more lines of information text, determined by the manufacturer,
providing the reasons for the call- clearing errors.

Page 3-296

+CFSN

This command displays the factory serial number.

Page 3-6

+CFUN

This command shuts down the phone functionality of smart phones
and PDAs with phone capabilities.

Page 3-204

+CGEQMIN

This command allows the TE to specify a minimum acceptable
profile, which is checked by the MT against the negotiated profile
returned in the Activate/Modify PDP Context Accept message.

Page 3-346

+CGEQNEG

This command allows the TE to retrieve the negotiated QoS
profiles returned in the Activate PDP Context Accept message.

Page 3-352

+CGEQREQ

This command allows the TE to specify a EDGE Quality of Service
Profile that is used when the MT sends an Activate PDP Context
Request message to the network.

Page 3-340

+CGMI

This command displays manufacturer identification.

Page 3-1

+CGMM

This command requests the model identification.

Page 3-2

+CGMR

This command requests the revision identification.

Page 3-3

+CGSN

This command requests the product serial number identification.

Page 3-3

+CHUP

This command causes the G24 to hang up the current GSM call.

page 3-35

+CIND

This command is used to query the status of various ME indicators. Page 3-316

+CKPD

This command emulates key presses, or virtual keycodes, as if
entered from the G24 keypad or from a remote handset.

Page 3-310

+CLAC

This command displays a list of all the AT commands supported by
the G24.

Page 3-9

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 2: Introduction to AT Commands

Table 2-1: Core AT Commands (Cont.)
AT Command

Description

Page

+CLCC

This command displays a list of all current G24 calls and their
statuses, and also enables/disables the unsolicited indication of the
call list.

Page 3-47

+CLVL

This command sets the volume of the internal loudspeaker of the
G24.

Page 3-233

+CMEE

This command enables/disables the use of result code +CME
ERROR:  as an indication of an error relating to the
functionality of the G24.

Page 3-289

+CMER

This command enables an external accessory to receive key press
information from the G24’s internal keypad.

Page 3-314

+CMGF

This command handles the selection of message formats.

Page 3-101

+CMUX

This command is used to enable/disable the GSM MUX
multiplexing protocol stack.

Page 3-438

+CNMI

This command sends an unsolicited indication when a new SMS
message is received by the G24.

Page 3-107

+CPAS

This command displays the current activity status of the G24, for
example, call in progress, or ringing.

Page 3-46

+CPIN

This command is only relevant for phones that use SIM cards. It
unlocks the SIM card when the proper SIM PIN is provided, and
unblocks the SIM card when the proper SIM PUK is provided.

Page 3-253

+CRC

This command controls whether to present the extended format of
the incoming call indication.

Page 3-19

+CRSM

This command provides limited access to the Elementary Files on
the SIM.

Page 3-302

+CRTT

This command plays one cycle of a ring tone, stops the cycle in the
middle, and sets the ring tone to be used.

Page 3-247

+CSDH

This command controls whether detailed header information is
shown in text mode result codes.

Page 3-106

+CSMP

This command sets the Text Module parameters.

Page 3-104

+CSQ

This command returns the signal strength received by the G24.

Page 3-167

+EMPC

This command unlocks or resets the first PLMN of the
inserted SIM.

Page 3-262

+EPIN

This command is only relevant for phones that use SIM cards. It
verifies the PIN2 indicator.

Page 3-256

+FMI

This command displays manufacturer identification.

Page 3-1

+FMM

This command displays the model identification.

Page 3-2

+FMR

This command displays the revision identification.

Page 3-3

+GCAP

This command requests the overall capabilities of the G24.

Page 3-197

+GMI

This command requests manufacturer identification. The command
is not supported when the SIM is missing.

Page 3-1

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

2-11

Core AT Commands

Table 2-1: Core AT Commands (Cont.)
AT Command

2-12

Description

Page

+GMM

This command requests the model identification.

Page 3-2

+GMR

This command requests the revision identification.

Page 3-3

+GSN

This command requests the product serial number identification.

Page 3-3

+IFC

This command controls the operation of the local flow control
between the terminal and the G24.

Page 3-430

+IPR

This command is responsible for setting and saving the request
baud rate.

Page 3-195

+MADIGITAL

This command switches between analog and digital audio modes.

Page 3-244

+MAFEAT

This command controls the various algorithm features, such as
sidetone, echo cancel and noise suppress.

Page 3-243

+MAMUT

This command controls the muting/unmuting of all input paths
(MIC, HDST_MIC, DIGITAL_RX).

Page 3-242

+MAPATH

This command sets/requests the active input accessory, and the
output accessory for each feature.

Page 3-237

+MAVOL

This command enables you to determine a volume setting for a
particular feature in a particular accessory.

Page 3-240

+MCEG

This command disables / enables EDGE support in G24 modules
with EDGE support capability.

Page 3-356

+MCELL

This command displays information about the Cellular Network.

Page 3-179

+MCST

This command displays the current state of the call processing, and
also enables/disables the unsolicited indication of any change in the
call processing state.

Page 3-49

+MCWAKE

This command displays reports on the status of the GPRS/GSM
coverage.

Page 3-202

+MDLC

This command establishes PPP link over serial port.

Page 3-337

+MIAU

This command manages IP Director addresses and port.

Page 3-338

+MSCTS

This command defines the behavior of the CTS line when the G24
is in Sleep mode.

Page 3-288

+MDC

This command enables you to select the desired messages to be
displayed upon connection of a voice call with a remote party.

Page 3-38

+MDSI

This command enables unsolicited reporting of indications of SIM
deactivation and invalidation.

Page 3-78

+MEDT

This command enables/disables the G24 tones.

Page 3-139

+MEMAS

This command is used for Email account settings.

Page 3-150

+MEMD

This command is used to delete an Email message.

Page 3-163

+MEMDE

This command is used to download an Email message.

Page 3-154

+MEMISP

This command is used for Email account ISP settings.

Page 3-149

+MEMGS

This command is used for Email account general settings.

Page 3-152

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 2: Introduction to AT Commands

Table 2-1: Core AT Commands (Cont.)
AT Command

Description

Page

+MEML

This command is used to list Email messages.

Page 3-159

+MEMSE

This command is used to send an Email message.

Page 3-156

+MEMR

This command is used to read an Email message.

Page 3-162

+MEMW

This command is used to write or update an Email message.

Page 3-165

+MFIC

This command instructs the G24 to query or set Filtering
Incoming Calls parameters.

Page 3-40

+MFOTAABOR
T

Aborts the DM session.

Page 3-270

+MFOTACNFG

This command enables setting the DM session as
Automatic/Non-Automatic (i.e. Transparent/Non-Transparent).

Page 3-266

+MFOTAIND

This command sends Unsolicited FOTA indications toward DTE.

Page 3-271

+MFOTAINSTL

Installs the updated package.

Page 3-270

+MFOTAREQ

This command sends FOTA requests toward DTE.

Page 3-268

+MFOTARSP

This command is used to send response to +MFOTAREQ reports.

Page 3-269

+MFOTAWSCF
G

This command sets the Web-Session default entry.

Page 3-265

+MGEER

This command returns the PDP context activation reject cause.

Page 3-299

+MGGIND

This command configures the service indicator on pin 49 of the 70
pin connector to be GPRS or GSM.

Page 3-203

+MIOC

This command defines the G24 8 GPIO pins data value.

Page 3-213

+MIOD

This command defines the G24 8 GPIO pins configuration.

Page 3-217

+MIPCFF

This command allows configuring the incoming TCP connection
filtering feature parameters, such as list of allowed IP addresses or
disabling/enabling the filtering.

Page 3-417

+MIPCONF

This command allows to configure TCP stack parameters, such as
retransmissions number, upper and bottom limits of retransmission
timeout, close delay.

Page 3-403

+MIPCSC

This AT command is used to configure the SSL feature behavior in
case of non - fatal alerts.

Page 3-414

+MIPDATA

This unsolicited event is sent to the terminal indicating a
data comes from Network when G24 is in pseudo-command
mode.

Page 3-401

+MIPODM

This command causes the G24 module to initialize a new socket in
Online Data Mode and open a connection with a remote side.

Page 3-389

+MMAD

This command reads and monitors digital value from a specified
ADC.

Page 3-219

+MPSU

This command defines the functionality of the second physical
UART.

Page 3-211

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

2-13

Core AT Commands

Table 2-1: Core AT Commands (Cont.)
AT Command

2-14

Description

Page

+MRICS

This command allows configuring the behavior of RI line in a case
of SMS arrival.

Page 3-142

+MRST

This command enables customer software to perform a hard reset
to the G24 unit.

Page 3-207

+MTCTS

This command sets the CTS pin of the RS232 to not active (high),
waits one second and then sets the CTS to active (low).

Page 3-198

+MTDTR

This command checks and displays the physical current status of
the DTR pin of the RS232.

Page 3-197

+MTTY

This command is used to enable/disable the TTY (Tele Typewriter)
support in the G24.

Page 3-44

+MVC

This AT command is used to choose and configure the
priority order of the supported voice codecs (vocoders).

Page 3-43

+TADIAG

This command queries actual ADC values of the antennas.

Page 3-210

+TASW

This command controls the antenna switch mechanism.

Page 3-209

+TCLCC

This command displays a list of all current G24 calls and their
statuses, and also enables/disables the unsolicited indication of the
call list.

Page 3-51

+TPIN

This command queries the number of remaining SIM PIN/PUK
entering attempts

Page 3-257

+TSMSRET

This command controls the SMS sending retry.

Page 3-142

+TWUR

This command is used to query the wakeup reason(s).

Page 3-209

+TWUS

This command is used to set the wakeup reason(s).

Page 3-207

A

This command answers an incoming call, placing the G24 into the
appropriate mode, as indicated by the RING message.

Page 3-19

D

This command places a voice call on the current network, when
issued from an accessory device.

Page 3-13

E

This command defines whether the G24 echoes the characters
received from the user, (whether input characters are echoed to
output).

Page 3-275

F

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

H

This command hangs up, or terminates a particular call.

Page 3-17

I

This command requests various G24 information items.

Page 3-6

L

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

M

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

N

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 2: Introduction to AT Commands

Table 2-1: Core AT Commands (Cont.)
AT Command

Description

Page

O

This command returns a phone to the Online Data mode and issues
a CONNECT or CONNECT  result code.

Page 3-34

P

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

Q

This command determines whether to output/suppress the result
codes.

Page 3-274

READY

This unsolicited notification indicates UART is ready.

Page 3-211

Sn

This command reads/writes values of the S-registers, and includes
registers 1-49, 94, 96 (Audio) and 102 (Sleep mode).

Page 3-277

T

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

V

This command determines the response format of the data adapter
and the contents of the header and trailer transmitted with the result
codes and information responses.

Page 3-273

X

This command defines the data adaptor response set, and the
CONNECT result code format.

Page 3-276

Y

This command is supported for backward compatibility only, and
has no effect.

Page 3-422

Z

This command resets the default configuration.

Page 3-282

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

2-15

Core AT Commands

2-16

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference
Modem ID
Subscriber Unit Identity
These commands allow the user to query the type of device that is attached, the technology used
in the device, as well as basic operating information about the device.

+CGMI, +GMI, +FMI, Request Manufacturer ID
These commands display manufacturer identification. The G24 outputs a string containing
manufacturer identification information, indicating that this is a Motorola device.
Command

Response/Action

AT+CGMI
AT+CGMI?

+CGMI: "Motorola"

AT+GMI
AT+GMI?

+CGMI: "Motorola"

AT+FMI
AT+FMI?

+CGMI: "Motorola"

Example
AT+CGMI
+CGMI: "Motorola"
OK
AT+GMI
+CGMI: "Motorola"
OK
AT+FMI
+CGMI: "Motorola"

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-1

Modem ID

+CGMM, +GMM, +FMM, Request Model ID
These commands request the model identification. The G24 outputs a string containing
information about the specific model, including a list of the supported technology used, and the
particular model number.

Command

Response/Action

AT+CGMM
AT+CGMM?

+CGMM: ,
technologies>,
technologies>,

Example
AT+CGMM?
+CGMM: "GSM900","GSM1800","GSM1900","GSM850","MODEL=G24"
OK

The following table shows the+CGMM string parameters.

String

3-2

Description

"GSM900"

GSM at 900 MHz

"GSM1800"

GSM at 1800 MHz

"GSM1900"

GSM at 1900 MHz (North American PCS)

"GSM850"

GSM at 850 MHz

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

+CGMR, +GMR, +FMR, Request Revision
These commands request the revision identification. The G24 outputs a string containing the
revision identification information of the software version contained within the device.

Command

Response/Action

AT+CGMR
AT+CGMR?

+CGMR: 

AT+GMR
AT+GMR?

+GMR: 

AT+FMR
AT+FMR?

+FMR: 

Example
AT+CGMR
+CGMR: "G24_G_0C.11.61R"
AT+GMR
+GMR: "G24_G_0C.11.61R"
AT+FMR
+FMR: "G24_G_0C.11.61R"

+CGSN, +GSN, Request Product Serial Number Identification
This command displays the product serial number identification IMEI (International Mobile
Equipment Identification). It can be used even when the SIM card is not inserted.

Command

December 31, 2007

Response/Action

AT+CGSN
AT+CGSN?

+CGSN: 

+GSN
+GSN?

+GSN: 

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-3

Modem ID

The following table shows the +CGSN, +GSN parameters.
Table 3-1: +CGSN, +GSN Parameters



Description
The IMEI (International Mobile Station Equipment Identity) number is comprised of
15 digits, as specified by GSM 03.03 [3]. IMEI numbers are composed of the
following elements, all in decimal digits:
Type Approval Code (TAC) - 6 digits
Serial Number (SNR) - 6 digits
Spare digit - 1 digit
The TAC and SNR are protected against unauthorized changes.

Example
AT+CGSN?
+CGSN: "004400013805666"
OK
AT+GSN
+GSN: "004400013805666"
OK

+CSCS, Select Terminal Character Set
This command selects the G24 character set. The G24 supports the following character sets:
GSM, UCS2, HEX, UTF8, 8859-1 and ASCII.
The default value, set upon system initialization or when omitting  in set command, is
ASCII.
Note: All commands except of +CUSD will treat "HEX" format just like UCS2.

Command
Type

3-4

Syntax

Response/Action

Set

+CSCS=[]

OK
or:
+CMS ERROR: 

Read

AT+CSCS?

+CSCS: 

Test

AT+CSCS=?

+CSCS: ()

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

The following table shows the +CSCS parameter optional values.
Table 3-2: +CSCS Parameters


Character Set

Input/Output Format

“ASCII”

ASCII (0x00 - 0x7F)

Quoted string.
(For example, "AB" equals two 8-bit
characters with decimal values 65, 66.)

“GSM”

GSM default alphabet
(GSM 03.38 subclause 6.2.1)

HEX representation.

"UCS2"

Unicode (ISO/IEC 10646 [32])

HEX representation.
(For example, 00410042 equals two
16-bit characters with decimal values 65,
66.)

"UTF8"

8-bit Unicode (ISO 10646 transformation
format)

HEX representation.

"8859-1"

LATIN (ISO 8859-1)

Quoted string.

"HEX"

Hexadecimal format presentation.

Character strings consist only of
hexadecimal numbers from 00 to FF; e.g.
"032FE6" equals three 8-bit characters
with decimal values 3, 47 and 230; no
conversions to the original ME character
set will be done. Used for +CUSD AT
command only. Can be defining by the
second parameter of the command.

Example
AT+CSCS=?
+CSCS: ("8859-1","ASCII","GSM","UCS2","UTF8")
OK
AT+CSCS?
+CSCS: "ASCII"
OK
AT+CPBS = "ME"
AT+CPBW=1,"8475763000",129,"Lin Zhao"
OK
AT+CSCS="UCS2"
OK
AT+CPBR=1
+CPBR: 1,"8475763000",129,004C006E006E0020005A00680061006F
OK
AT+CSCS="ASCII"
OK
AT+CPBR=1
+CPBR: 1,"8475763000",129,"Lin Zhao"
OK

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-5

Modem ID

+CIMI, Request IMSI
This command displays the International Mobile Subscriber Identity number.

Command
AT+CIMI
AT+CIMI?

Response/Action
+CIMI: 
or:
+CME ERROR: 

Example
AT+CIMI
+CIMI: 314566320021400

+CFSN, Read Factory Serial Number
This command is used to query the factory serial number.

Command
AT+CFSN?

Response/Action
+CFSN: 

Example
AT+CFSN?
+CFSN: "074SFX5854"
OK

I, Request Identification Information
This command displays various G24 information items.

Command
ATIn

3-6

Response/Action

or:
+CMS ERROR: 

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

The following table shows the information items that are supported by the G24.

ATIn

Description

Output

3

Reports Product Title

Motorola Mobile Phone

5

Reports Software Architecture

P2K

7

Reports Product Description



8

Reports Software Version



9

Reports Flex Version



Example
ATI7
G24 OEM Module
OK
ATI8
G24_G_0C.11.61R
OK
ATI9
GCEG24x000AA028
OK

+CNUM, Request MSISDN(s)
This command displays up to five strings of text information that identify the G24. The output
string contains double quotes.
On SIM cards that have EFmsisdn file, the string(s) returned are the MSISDN numbers and their
associated data.
On SIM cards that don't have EFmsisdn file, the strings returned are the MSISDN numbers and
their associated data stored in G24 NVM.

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-7

Modem ID

Read Command

Command

Response/Action

+CNUM (MSISDN supported)

+CNUM: [],,
[+CNUM: [],,]
[...]

+CNUM (MSISDN not supported)

+CNUM: 

The following table shows the +CNUM parameters.
Table 3-3: +CNUM Parameters



Description
Phone number type
129 Use for local call
145 Use “+” for international access code
128 Unknown

Example
AT+CNUM?
+CNUM: "David","035558278",129
AT+CNUM //MSISDNs supported
+CNUM: "PHONENUM1","2173848500",129
+CNUM: "PHONENUM2","2173848501",129
+CNUM: "PHONENUM3","2173848502",129
+CNUM:"","",0
+CNUM:"","",0
AT+CNUM //MSISDNs not supported
+CNUM: "Motomix","2233445",129
+CNUM:"","",0
+CNUM:"","",0
+CNUM:"","",0

$, List of All Available AT Commands
This command displays a list of all the AT commands supported by the G24.

Command
AT$

3-8

Response/Action
List of available AT commands

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

+CLAC, List of All Available AT Commands

Command
Execute

Syntax
+CLAC

Response/Action
List of available AT
commands

Remarks
The Execute command displays a list
of all the AT commands supported by
the G24.

Example
AT+CLAC
$
%C
&C
&D
&F
&G
&K
&L
&M
&P
&R
&S
&T
*D
+CACM
+CALC
+CALM
+CAMM
+CAOC
+CBAND
+CBAUD
+CBC
+CBST
+CCFC
+CCLK
+CCWA
+CEER
:
:
:
:
?
A
D
DL
E
F
H
I

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-9

Modem ID

L
M
N
O
P
Q
S
T
V
X
Y
Z
\A
\S
OK

Capability Reporting
This set of commands enables a user to determine G24’s protocol level. It also enables other
support provided by the G24, such as information about the currently implemented protocol
version (used to detect older G24s that may not support all commands), as well as determining
which optional commands are implemented in a particular G24 software load.

3-10

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

Call Control
Managing a CSD (Data) Call
The G24 working modes can be divided into two modes of operation.
• Data Mode: In this mode, once the G24 has established a link with the remote modem, it does
not respond to any data passing through it (except for the Escape Sequence search). The G24
becomes a transparent link, connecting the terminal with the remote side.
• Command Mode: In this mode, the G24 responds to the AT commands issued by the
terminal. This is the default working mode.
Note: It is possible to switch between the operating modes.

The operating modes can operate simultaneously using the Mux.
The Terminal mode allows you to instruct the modem to dial a remote modem by issuing the Dial
command followed by the phone number. You can also include dial string modifiers in your
command line to give the modem additional instructions. The following dial modifiers are
available on most modems:
• ","- Pause

Simple Dialing
In order to instruct the modem to dial a remote modem from an ordinary tone-dialing telephone
line, enter the Dial command followed by the phone number. For example, type the following
command:
ATD 876-5555 

Note: If you receive characters which were sent, you can disable this with using the Echo

command (ATE0 ).
After issuing the Dial command, and if the remote modem answers the call, the two modems send
high-pitched carrier tones to one another which establish the transmission speed and other
parameters for the data connection. This process is called negotiation.
After the negotiation process, the message, "OK" followed by the connection speed, is received.
If the other phone line is busy, the message "NO CARRIER" is received.
If the other modem does not answer, the message "NO CARRIER" is received.
Once a connection has been established, the modem is ready to immediately begin transmitting
and receiving data. This may vary from sending messages to each other, sending or receiving
files, logging on to an information service, or any other data communication task you wish to
perform.

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-11

Call Control

Switching From Data Mode to Command Mode
To switch the connection from Data mode to Command mode, send the Escape Sequence
command (+++).
If the modem responds with "OK" to the Escape command, the modem is in Command mode and
the dial connection is still active, and you can use the AT command set.
Note: The character '+' in the Escape Sequence pattern can be changed using the S2 S-register.

Refer to “S, Bit Map Registers”, page 3-277.
Escape is detected only by the G24 and not by the remote side. The remote side stays in
the Data mode.

Hanging Up
If you are using a communications program, use the "Hang up" or "Disconnect" AT command in
the program to disconnect the call.
When using computers in the "Dumb Terminal mode", return to the Command mode by typing
the Escape Sequence, +++, and then hang up by typing the Hang up command as follows:
ATH 

If the G24 responds with "OK", the dial connection is closed.

Dialing to an Electronic Telephone Service
When you dial to an electronic telephone service such as telephone banking, you must typically
instruct the modem to dial a number, then to wait for call establishment, and then send the
password for entering the banking account. A typical command line might look like this:
ATD876-5555,123456; 

The modem dials the number, then pauses to wait for the call connection (the comma in the
command line causes the pause).
You can also create a longer pause by including several commas in a row in the command line,
and then send the password to the service.

Receiving a Data Call
ATA 

This command instructs the modem to be the "answering modem". Either party may be the
answering or the originating modem, but both parties cannot be the same modem at the same
time.
You hear the modem handshake and see the result code "CONNECT".
Note: Outgoing Voice Call during CSD Call, when switching to Command mode.

If using Dial Command to make Outgoing Voice Call, currently active CSD Call is
dropped and the new Voice Call is generated.

3-12

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

Call Control AT Commands
D, Dial Command
This command places a FAX/DATA/VOICE call on the current network.
The default call type is a data call (CSD). If the +FCLASS command was used to set the call type
to be FAX, then the outgoing call is a fax call.
There must be an explicit request in order to make a VOICE call. This request bypasses the
+FCLASS setting.
If a DATA/FAX call was originated and answered by the remote side, a "OK" notification is sent
to the terminal from the G24, and it moves to the online Data/Fax state (respectively).
For more information about call failure, use the AT+CEER command, described in “+CEER,
Extended Error Report” on page 3-296.
Note: If there is an active voice call and the terminal sends another ATD voice call command to

the G24, the active call is put on hold and the new number is called.

Command
ATD[;]

Response/Action
VOICE CALL:
1st response - Voice call place begins
OK

2nd response - Voice call connected:
OK

DATA/FAX:
2nd response only - Data/Fax call connected
CONNECT

When MO call fails:
1. Connection Failure - NO CARRIER or BUSY or NO ANSWER
2. General Failure - ERROR
3. Security reason (such as SIM not present) - OPERATION NOT
ALLOWED
4. Unknown reason - UNKNOWN CALLING ERROR

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-13

Call Control

The following table shows the D parameters.
Table 3-4: D Parameters


Description



Valid phone digits are: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 * # + and,
The following characters are ignored: A B C D - () / and .
The comma <,> digit: When dialing a voice call, digits until the comma are
considered addressing information (phone number). Any digits after the comma are
sent as DTMF tones after the voice call is connected. More than one comma causes a
pause in sending the tones. When dialing a data/fax call, the comma digit is ignored,
and all other digits before and after the comma are considered addressing information
(phone number).
The plus <+> digit: Indicates that the international access code exists in the number.

semicolon (;)

When given after , a voice call is originated to the given address,
otherwise a data call is originated.

Note: ATDP, ATDT, AT*D, , 
 and <*> are ignored. The command is handled as ATD.

The control of supplementary services through the Dial command is not supported as
these are controlled through the specific supplementary service commands (CCFC,
CLCK, and so on.)
Initiating a GPRS connection is done through ATD*99#, as described in “D*99, Request
GPRS Service "D"” on page 3-332.
Example
atd44345678;//VOICE call (with semicolon)
OK
OK
atd44345678 //DATA/ FAX call (without semicolon)
...
CONNECT //Move to online Data state

D>, Direct Dialing from Phone Books
This command places a FAX/DATA/VOICE call on the current network by dialing directly from
the G24 phone book.
Notes:

• "+CME ERROR: not found" is returned when no match is found in an existing
phone book.

• FD phone book supports the (?) wild card character. Telephone numbers
containing this character cannot be dialed directly from the phone book.
• "+CME ERROR: Invalid index" is returned when entry  is out of the
requested Phonebook range.
• When SM phonebook is searched and the given entry value is of the ME
phonebook, ME phonebook will be searched as well (result code would be the
same as if MT phonebook was searched).

3-14

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

The following table shows a detailed description for the D> commands.

Command

Detailed Description

D>[;]

Originates a call to a phone number with the corresponding alphanumeric field
. The Current Phone Book (Set by +CPBS) is searched for the entry that
begins with the alphanumeric pattern .

D>mem[;]

Originates a call to a phone number in memory (phone book) mem and stored in entry
location . Available memories may be queried with Select Phone Book
Storage Test command +CPBS=?, described See Note 1 on page 3-71.
Note: This command does not change the used memory set.

D>[;]

Originates a call to a phone number from entry location  in the Current Phone
Book (Set by +CPBS).

Note: Current used memory (phone book) set/read is done through the memory command
+CPBS=/+CPBS? respectively.

The following table shows the D> parameters.
Table 3-5: D> Parameters


Description

<"alpha">

String type value, which should be equal to an alphanumeric field in a phone book
entry. The used character set should be the one selected with Select Terminal
Character Set +CSCS.  is case-sensitive, and should be placed in quotes
("alpha").



This parameter is also called "speed dial location". It is an integer type memory
location.  should be in the range of locations available in the memory used.

<"mem">

This parameter is not case-sensitive, and should be placed in quotes ("mem").

Example
AT+CPBS="me"//Phone flash memory
OK
AT+CSCS="ASCII"//ASCII characters
OK
AT+CPBW=1,"035659090",129,"VoiceMail"
OK
AT+CPBR=1
+CPBR: 001,"035659090",129,"VoiceMail"
OK
atd>"VoiceMail";//Phonebook by name
OK
OK
ath
NO CARRIER
OK

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-15

Call Control

atd>1;//Speed dial from phonebook
OK
OK
ath
NO CARRIER
OK
atd>1//Speed dial from phonebook
+CME ERROR://Invalid characters in dial string
atd>"Motorola Internal"
+CME ERROR://Invalid characters in dial string

For more examples, refer to “Call Control” on page 4-14 and “Data Call” on page 4-18.

DL, Dial Last Number
The DL command places a data/voice call to the last number dialed. The call progress
information (success/failure) is reported in the same way as for the Dial command. (Refer to “D,
Dial Command”, page 3-13).

Command
ATDL[;]

Detailed Description
Initial Response - Last Number retrieved:
ATDL: "DIAL DIGITS"
2nd response - Data/Fax call connected CONNECT
1st response - Voice call placement begins
OK
2nd response - Voice call connected OK

The following table shows the DL parameters.
Table 3-6: DL Parameters

semicolon (;)

Description
If the semicolon (;) is given, a voice call is originated to the last dialed number.
If the semicolon (;) is not given, a Fax/Data call is originated.
Note: The last dialed call type is irrelevant to the DL command.

Note: When ATDL is issued after a dialed number with comma digit:

3-16

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

•ATDL; (Voice) dials the exact number that was last dialed, including the DTMF tones
sent.
•ATDL (Data/Fax) dials the addressing information only (comma and tones are
discarded).
•If ATDL is sent before any Dial command was issued (mainly after Power On, when the
last number is an empty field), the G24 will return NO CARRIER, as mentioned in the
ITU V.25-ter standard.
Example
atdl //Last called number is "035658278"
ATDL: "035658278"
OK //DATA call
atdl;
ATDL: "035658278"
OK
OK //VOICE call
atdl //Last called number is "035658278,123,78;"
ATDL: "035658278"
CONNECT //DATA call
atdl; //Last called number is "035658278,123,78"
ATDL: "035658278p123p78"
OK
OK //VOICE call
1 2 3 //Sent as DTMF tones
...
//Pause
7 8 //Sent as DTMF tones

H, Hang-up Call
This command hangs up a call. The G24 terminates the call whether it is a data or voice call, and
whether it is an incoming, originating, waiting, or connected call.
A NO CARRIER message is returned to the terminal before the regular OK approval.
Note: To terminate (hang-up) a MO data/fax call while call is placed: Any character sent from

the terminal to the G24 causes the Data/Fax call termination, and NO CARRIER is sent
from the G24 to the terminal.
To terminate a held Voice call or to terminate a call out of a MTPY call, refer to “+CHLD,
Call Related Supplementary Services Command” on page 3-25.
The following table shows the call states of the H command.

Call State

Response/Action

IDLE

Error 3 ("operation not allowed") or OK, depending
on a FLEX bit

Single Active

Call released

MTPY Active

Call released (all calls)

Incoming call (RING)

Call released

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-17

Call Control

Call State

Response/Action

Single Active and Waiting Call

Single Active released (waiting not affected)

MTPY Active and Waiting Call

MTPY Active released (waiting not affected)

Single Held or MTPY Held

Error 3

Single (or MTPY) Active and Single (or
MTPY) Held

Single (or MTPY) Active released

Held (Single or MTPY) and Waiting Call

Waiting call released

Single (or MTPY) Active and Single (or
MTPY) Held & Waiting call

Single (or MTPY) Active released

Example
RING//Incoming call
RING //Incoming call
ath //Hang-up incoming call
NO CARRIER
OK //Incoming call has been terminated - user determined user busy
RING
ata
OK //Voice call connected
ath //Hang-up connected call
NO CARRIER
OK //Active call has been hung-up - terminated
(... Active multi party call, with 3 numbers …)
ath
NO CARRIER
NO CARRIER
NO CARRIER
OK
atd035659260;
OK
ath //Terminate MO voice call while placed
NO CARRIER
OK
Example - Hanging up a data call:
atd035659260
CONNECT//Data call connected - Online Data mode
…
+++ //ESC Sequence is sent from the terminal to the G24
OK //The G24 is in Command mode
ath //Terminate Data call
NO CARRIER
OK

3-18

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

A, Answer Incoming Call
This command answers an incoming VOICE/DATA/FAX call after a RING/+CRING indication
is sent to the terminal.
If the incoming call is answered (connected), the G24 sends a CONNECT notification to the
terminal.
If the MT call fails, the possible notifications are:
• NO CARRIER - Connection Failure

• ERROR - General Failure
Note: A waiting call (an incoming call while a call is in progress) is announced by +CCWA

rather than RING. A waiting call can be answered only if it is a voice call. The waiting
voice call should be answered using the ATA command, which will put the active call on
hold and will connect the waiting call, making it the active call. This ATA action is the
same action as AT+CHLD=2.
Example
Example - Answering a voice call:
AT+CRC=1
+CRING: VOICE
+CRING: VOICE
ata
OK //VOICE call connected - G24 is in Command mode
ath
NO CARRIER
OK
Example - Answering a data call:
+CRING: REL ASYNC
+CRING: REL ASYNC
ata
...
//Connecting (dots are not displayed)
OK //DATA call connected - G24 is in Online Data mode

Note: In a CSD call, call release is not valid during the phase of call negotiation (from OK until

connect call).

+CRC, Cellular Result Codes and RING, +CRING - Incoming Call
Indication
This command controls whether or not to present the extended format of an incoming call
indication. The RING/+CRING indication is sent from the G24 to the terminal when the G24 is
alerted by an incoming call from the network. Once this indication is sent, information is
available on the calling line via +CLIP. When +CRC is disabled, the indication is RING, and
when +CRC is enabled, the indication is +CRING.

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-19

Call Control

Command
Type

Syntax

Response/Action

Remarks

Set

+CRC=[]

OK

The Set command enables/disables the
extended format of an incoming call
indication. When enabled, an incoming
call is indicated to the terminal with an
unsolicited result code
+CRING: instead of the normal
RING.

Read

+CRC?

+CRC: 
OK

The Read command queries the current
settings for the cellular result code.

Test

+CRC=?

+CRC: (list of supported s) The Test command returns the possible

 values.

RING/+CRING Indication
+CRING: 
or:
RING

The following table shows the +CRC parameters.
Table 3-7: +CRC Parameters


Description



0
Extended format disabled
1
Extended format enabled
The default value is 0.


ASYNCCSD
REL ASYNCCSD
FAX
VOICE
ALT

Type of incoming call:
asynchronous transparent
asynchronous non-transparent
Fax class 1
Normal voice
Fax/voice

Example
AT+CRC?
+CRC: 0
OK
AT+CRC=?
+CRC: (0-1)
OK
Example - RING/+CRING indication
(..Incoming Data Call..)
RING
RING

3-20

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

RING
AT+CRC=1//Enable extended ring format
OK
+CRING: REL ASYNC
+CRING: REL ASYNC
ath
AT+CRC=1
OK //Mobile fax call terminated (multi-numbered scheme) from PSTN fax machine
+CRING: ALT Voice/Fax
NO CARRIER
OK

+CLIP, Calling Line Identification
This command controls the Calling Line Identity (CLI) presentation indication to the terminal
when an incoming call is detected by the G24.
This command allows the user to query the provisioning status of the CLI by the network and by
the G24. The command also allows the user to enable/disable the CLI presentation by the G24 to
the terminal.
The +CLIP indication information varies depending on what is provided by the network and what
information is stored in the G24 phone book.

Command
Type
Set

Syntax
AT+CLIP=

Response/Action
OK
+CME ERROR: 

Remarks
The Set command enables or disables
the presentation of the CLI indication
from the G24 to the terminal.
Note: The Set command does not

address the network.
Read

AT+CLIP?

+CLIP: , 
OK

Test

The Read command returns the +CLIP
enable/disable state in the G24 as well
as in the network provisioning state of
the CLI presentation.
The Test command returns the Set
command options (0,1).

+CLIP Indication
When the CLI presentation indication is enabled by the G24 (=1), this unsolicited indication
is sent to the terminal after the RING indication.
+CLIP:,[,,[,[][,]]]

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-21

Call Control

The following table shows the +CLIP parameters.

Table 3-8: +CLIP Parameters


Description



Enables/disables the CLI presentation indication after the ring indication:
0
Disable CLI presentation
1
Enable CLI presentation
The default is 0.



Shows the subscriber CLIP service status in the network:
0
CLIP not provisioned
1
CLIP provisioned
2
Unknown (for example, no network and so on)

<"number">

Calling line number. The number format is specified by .



Type of address octet in integer format:
145 Default when the dialing string includes the international access code character
"+".
129 Default when making a local call.
128 Type of number is unknown (usually the output when the number itself is
unknown).



NULL, field not used (String type subaddress of format specified by )



Field not used. Value is always 128 (unknown) - type of sub address octet in integer
format.

<"alpha">

Name of the calling party (if provided by the network or if the number is found in the
G24 phone books).



The Validity of the Calling Line Identity presentation:
0
CLI valid.
1
CLI has been withheld by the originator.
2
CLI is not available due to networking problems or limitations of the
originating network.

Example
AT+CLIP=?
+CLIP: (000,001)//CLI presentation is disabled by the G24 (0) and is enabled by the network (1)
OK
AT+CLIP=1
OK
Example +CLIP indication:
(…incoming call…)
RING
+CLIP: "2173845400",129,,128,"Doe John",0
Example +CLIP indication with restricted CLI:
AT+CRC=1
OK
(…incoming call…, caller restricted the CLI presentation (used AT+CLIR)…)
+CRING: VOICE
+CLIP: "",128,,128,"",1

3-22

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

+CCWA, Call Waiting Command
This command controls the Call Waiting supplementary service, including the settings and the
queries of the G24 and the network. When the Call Waiting indication is enabled by the G24 and
there is a waiting call, a +CCWA: indication is sent from the G24 to the terminal.
Note: The G24 supports only one of the services at a time: Voice, Data or Fax. Multiparty is a

voice-only functionality.
A CCWA indication is sent to the terminal only during a voice call-waiting event. A
CCWA indication is not sent for a fax/data call during in a voice session.

Action
Set

Syntax
+CCWA=[[,
[,]]]

Response

Remarks

OK
If =2 and the
command succeeds:
+CCWA:
,
[+CCWA:
,
[...]]
OK

The Set command enables/disables the
Call-Waiting indication in the G24 and in
the network. Activation, deactivation and
status query are supported.
Note: When the  parameter is set

to 2 (network query), the 
parameter is ignored. This means
that no enable/disable action is
performed while querying the
network.

Read

+CCWA?

+CCWA: 
OK

The Read command returns the
enable/disable status of the call waiting
indication in the G24 ().

Test

+CCWA=?

+CCWA: (list of
supported s)

The Test command returns  values
supported by the G24 as a compound
value.

+CCWA Indication
When a call-waiting indication is enabled by the G24 (=1), the following unsolicited
indication is sent to the terminal from the G24:
+CCWA:,,,[][,]

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-23

Call Control

The following table shows the +CCWA parameters.

Table 3-9: +CCWA Parameters


Description



Enables/disables the call waiting indication to the terminal by the G24.
0 - Disable
1 - Enable
The default is 0.



Call waiting service request to the network. When the  parameter is not given,
the network is not interrogated.
0 - Disable
1 - Enable
2 - Query status



Sum of integers each representing a class of information.
1 - Voice (telephony)
2 - Data (refers to all bearer services)
4 - Fax (facsimile services)
The default value is 7.

<"number">

Calling line number. The number format is specified by .



Type of address octet in integer format:
145 - Default when the dialing string includes the international access code character
"+".
129 - Default when making a local call.
128 - Type of number is unknown (usually the output when the number itself is
unknown)



Call waiting support by the network (output for =2).
0 - Not active
1 - Active

<"alpha">

Name of the calling party (if provided by the network or if the number is found in the
G24 phone books).



The Validity of the Calling Line Identity presentation:
0 - CLI valid.
1 - CLI has been withheld by the originator.
2 - CLI is not available due to networking problems or limitations of the originating
network.

Note: When the parameter  is 2 (Query status), the first parameter is ignored and the

third parameter is always treated as class = 7.
Example
AT+CCWA=1 //Enable call waiting on G24
OK
AT+CCWA=?
+CCWA: (0,1)
OK
AT+CCWA?
+CCWA: 1

3-24

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

OK
Examples of +CCWA set command - network interrogation
AT+CCWA=1,2//Class parameter is considered as 7
+CCWA: 1,1//Call waiting is active for class 1, voice
+CCWA: 2,0//Call waiting is not active for class 2, data
+CCWA: 4,0//Call waiting is not active for class 4, fax
OK
AT+CCWA=1,2,2//Class parameter is 2
+CCWA: 2,0//Call waiting is not active for class 2, data
+CCWA: 4,0//Call waiting is not active for class 4, fax
OK
AT+CCWA=1,1
OK //Enable the call waiting feature in the network, and in the G24
Example +CCWA indication
atd9311234567; //Originate a voice call
OK
OK //Voice call connected
(...conversation...)
(… call waiting indication received by the G24 …)
+CCWA: "+358317654321",145,1,"Bob"
+CCWA: "+358317654321",145,1,"Bob"
AT+CHLD=0 //Release the waiting call
OK
NO CARRIER
AT+CRC=1//RING indication is not relevant to CCWA indication
OK
(…waiting call…, caller restricted to its CLI presentation (used AT+CLIR)…)
+CCWA: "",128,1,"",1//CLI is restricted, but call type recognized as voice
+CCWA: "",128,1,"",1

+CHLD, Call Related Supplementary Services Command
This command controls the Call Hold and Multiparty Conversation services. This command
manipulates voice calls only.
Set Command
The Set command allows the control of the following call related services:
• Call HOLD: A call can be temporarily disconnected from the G24, but the connection is
retained by the network.
• MTPY (Multi party) Conversation: Conference calls.
The network does not reserve more than one traffic channel for a mobile station, therefore the
G24 can have only one call on hold at a time.
Note: Only voice calls can be put on HOLD.

A precondition for the multi-party service is that the G24 is in control of one active call
and one call on hold. In this situation, the G24 can request the network to begin the MTPY
(Multi Party) service. Once a MTPY call is active, remote parties may be added,

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-25

Call Control

disconnected or separated (removed from the MTPY call, but remain connected to the
served mobile subscriber).The maximum number of remote parties is 5.
In this command, the term CALL refers to a single or MTPY call.
A single Active call is considered a MTPY call with one call index numbered as 1.

Command
+CHLD=

If the call is terminated:
OK (approve request was submitted)
NO CARRIER
If the call state is changed (link, split, from active to hold, and so on):
OK (approve request was done)
If the call is terminated and another call is answered:
OK (approve request was submitted)
NO CARRIER
OK (call answered and is now connected)

Command
Type
Test

Response/Action

Syntax
+CHLD=?

Response/Action

Remarks

+CHLD: (list of supported s) The Test command returns  values
supported by the G24 to the terminal
OK

The following table shows the +CHLD parameters.
Table 3-10: +CHLD Parameters



Description
Call hold operation:
0 - Releases all held calls
OR
Sets User Determined User Busy for a waiting call
1 - Releases all active calls and accepts the held or waiting call
1x - Release specific call x, where x is the serial number of a call participating in an
active MTPY call.
2 - Places all active calls on hold and accepts the held or waiting call
2x - In the case of an active MTPY call, places all active calls on hold, except for call
x. Call x remains active.
3 - Adds a held call to the conversation - MTPY
Note: "Held calls" or "active calls" means a held or active single or MTPY call. There

cannot be two or more different held/active single/MTPY calls.

3-26

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

The following table shows the +CHLD actions according to state and operation:
Table 3-11: +CHLD Actions According to Call State and Operation
CHLD 
Call State

0 -Release
Held Call

1 - Release
Active Call,
Accept Held
Call

1x - Release
Active/Held
Call x from
MTPY Call

2 - Switch
Between
Held and
Active Call

2x - Active
MTPY Call to
Hold, Except
for Call x

3 - Add Held
Call to
Active Call

IDLE

Error 3

Single Active
Call

Error 3.

Releases
active call.

If x=1,
releases
active call,
otherwise
error 22.

Puts active
call on hold.

Error 3.

Error 3.

MTPY Active
Call

Error 3.

Releases
active call.

Releases
specific
active call x.
If x does not
exist, then
error 22.

Puts active
call on hold.

Split. If call x
does not exist,
then error 22.

Error 3.

Incoming
Call (RING)

Error 3.

Single Active
Call and
Waiting Call

Releases
waiting call.

Releases
active call,
accepts
waiting call.

Releases
specific
active call x.
If x does not
exist, then
error 22.

Puts active
call on hold,
accepts
waiting call.

Error 3.

Error 3.

MTPY Active
Call and
Waiting Call

Releases
waiting call.

Releases
active call,
accepts
waiting call.

Releases
specific
active call x.
If x does not
exist, then
error 22.

Puts active
call on hold
and accepts
waiting call.

Split. If x
does not exist,
then error 22.

Error 3.

Single Held
Call

Releases held
call.

Accepts held
call.

Releases held
call.

Accepts held
call.

Error 3.

Error 3.

MTPY Held
Call

Releases held
call.

Accepts held
call.

Releases
specific
call x. If x
does not exist,
then error 22.

Accepts held
call.

Error 3.

Error 3.

Single (or
MTPY)
Active Call
and Single (or
MTPY) Held
Call

Releases held
call.

Releases
active call
and accepts
held call.

Releases
specific
active call x.
If x does not
exist, then
error 22.

Switches.

Error 3.

Makes a
conference
call.

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-27

Call Control

Table 3-11: +CHLD Actions According to Call State and Operation (Cont.)
CHLD 

0 -Release
Held Call

1 - Release
Active Call,
Accept Held
Call

1x - Release
Active/Held
Call x from
MTPY Call

2 - Switch
Between
Held and
Active Call

Held (Single
or MTPY)
Call and
Waiting Call

Releases
waiting call.

Accepts
waiting call.

Error 3.

Accepts
waiting call.

Error 3.

Error 3.

Single (or
MTPY)
Active Call
and Single (or
MTPY) Held
and Waiting
Call

Releases
waiting call.

Releases
active call,
and accepts
waiting call.

Releases
specific
active call x.
If x does not
exist, then
error 22.

Error 3 (too
many calls on
hold.

Error 3.

Makes a
conference
call. Waiting
call is not
touched.

Call State

2x - Active
MTPY Call to
Hold, Except
for Call x

3 - Add Held
Call to
Active Call

Split: Places the active MTPY call on hold, except for a specific call x.
Switch: Places the active call on hold and accepts the Held call
Error 3: "Operation not allowed"
Error 22: "Not found"

Example
AT+CHLD=?
+CHLD: (0,1,1x,2,2x,3)
OK
AT+CCWA=1//Enable call waiting
OK
atd9311234567; //Originate a voice call
OK
OK
(...conversation...)
+CCWA: "+358317654321",145,1,"Bob" //Awaiting call alerts
AT+CHLD=2 //Put first call on hold and answer the second call
OK
(...conversation...)
AT+CHLD=3 //Add the held call to the conversation
OK
(...MTPY conversation...)
AT+CHLD=22 //Split: Place the MO active call on hold, MT call remains active
OK
AT+CHLD=0 //Release the held call
OK
NO CARRIER
ath //Release the active call
NO CARRIER
OK
atd9311234567; //Originate a voice call
OK

3-28

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

OK
+CCWA: "055728386",129,1,"",0 //Waiting call alerts
AT+CHLD=1//Release the active call, accept the waiting call
OK
NO CARRIER//Active 9311234567 was released
OK //Waiting 055728386 was answered

+CCFC, Call Forwarding Number and Conditions
This command enables control of the call-forwarding supplementary service. Registration,
erasure, activation, deactivation, and status query are supported.

Command
Type

Syntax

Response/Action

Remarks

Set

+CCFC=,
[,[,[,
[,[,[,]]]]]]

If the command succeeds:
+CCFC:
,[,,
[,,[,]]][

+CCFC:
,[,,
[,,[,]]][...]]
+CCFC: (list of supported s)

The Set command
instructs the G24
which call
forwarding settings
to request from
network. The Set
command, in query
mode, interrogates
the network about
the subscriber
current call
forwarding status.

Test

+CCFC=?

+CCFC:
OK

The Test command
returns 
values supported
by the G24 to the
terminal.

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-29

Call Control

The following table shows the +CCFC parameters.
Table 3-12: +CCFC Parameters


Description



0 - Unconditional
1 - Mobile busy
2 - No reply
3 - Not reachable
4 - All call forwarding
5 - All conditional call forwarding



0 - Disable
1 - Enable
2 - Query status
3 - Registration
4 - Erasure

<"number">

Calling line number. The number format is specified by .



Type of address octet in integer format-.
145 Default when dialing string includes international access code character "+".
129 Default when making a local call.



NULL, field not used (String type subaddress of format specified by ).



Field not used. Value is always 128 (unknown) - type of sub address octet in integer
format.



The sum of integers each representing a class of information.
1 - Voice
2 - Data - refers to all bearer services.
4 - Fax
The default value is 7.



1-30 - The number of seconds to wait before calls are forwarded, when "no reply" is
enabled or queried. The default value is 20.
Note: The parameter must be a multiple of 5, for example, 5, 10, 15 and so on. If not,

the modulo of 5 will be ignored.


0 - Not active
1 - Active

Note: A forward-to phone  (and the optional fields ,  and )

are tied to a  and a . This means that there can be a different 
for the same  because of a different . When registering without
mentioning a , =7 is selected.
A  field is mandatory when registering (=3) and it is irrelevant
(ignored) in all other s.

3-30

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

Example
AT+CCFC=?
+CCFC: (0,1,2,3,4,5)
OK
AT+CCFC=0,3,"01256316830",129,1
OK
AT+CCFC=1,3,"0545658278",129,1//Register UC forward-to of all classes.
OK
AT+CCFC=1,1//Activate UC forward-to of all classes.
OK
AT+CCFC=1,2 //Interrogate reason not-reachable of all classes.
+CCFC: 1,1,"+97254151200",145
+CCFC: 0,2,"",0
+CCFC: 0,4,"",0
OK //For =3, forward only voice calls is activated.
AT+CCFC=4,2//Interrogate reason all-call-forwarding for all classes.
+CME ERROR: no network service//Interrogation of =30 is not supported by network.
AT+CCFC=2,3,"+972545658278"
OK
AT+CCFC=2,0//Disable call-forwarding for reason no-reply of all classes.
OK
AT+CCFC=2,2
+CCFC: 0,1,"+972545658278",145,,25
+CCFC: 0,2,"+972545658278",145,,25
+CCFC: 0,4,"+972545658278",145,,25
OK

+CLIR, Calling Line Identification Restriction
This command instructs the G24 to query, enable or disable the presentation of the CLI (calling
line ID) of a MO call to the called party. The restriction of the CLI (disable presentation) is
dependent both on the G24 and on the network.
The network enables three possible provisions of CLIR:
• Not provisioned (CLIR Off - presentation allowed)

• Provisioned permanently
• Provisioned with Temporary mode
The provision is fixed and cannot be changed by an AT command.
Temporary Mode:
Temporary mode can be in one of two states:
• A - Presentation restricted (CLIR On) as default.

• B - Presentation allowed (CLIR Off) as default. A subscriber to Temporary mode always has
a default subscription to state A or B. Temporary-mode provisioning means that the terminal
can request the G24 to switch the default mode from A to B, and vice versa.
Note: When a service is in state A, and the terminal wants to enable the CLI presentation (turn

CLIR off) for a single call, it can do so using the ATD command. This does not change

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-31

Call Control

the Temporary mode state. This can also be done when the service is in state B and the
terminal wants to disable the CLI presentation (turn CLIR on) for a single call.

Command
Type

Syntax

Response/Action

Remarks

Set

+CLIR=

OK

The Set command instructs the G24 to
enable/disable CLI restriction for all MO
calls.

Read

+CLIR?

+CLIR:,
OK

The Read command returns the current
setting of CLIR on the network  and
on the G24 .

Test

+CLIR=?

+CLIR: (list of supported
s)

The Test command returns  values
supported by the G24.

The following table shows the +CLIR parameters.
Table 3-13: +CLIR Parameters


Description



Adjustment for outgoing calls
0 - Presentation indicator is used according to the subscription of the CLIR service
1 - CLIR invocation
2 - CLIR suppression
The default is 2.



Subscriber CLIR service status in the network
0 - CLIR not provisioned
1 - CLIR provisioned in permanent mode
2 - Unknown (for example, no network and so on)
3 - CLIR Temporary mode presentation restricted (can be the default)
4 - CLIR Temporary mode presentation allowed (can be the default)

Example
AT+CLIR=?
+CLIR: (0,1,2)
OK
AT+CLIR?
+CLIR: 1,4
AT+CLIR=2
OK
atd054565195;//MO voice call
OK
(… calling …)
(… a G24 that has 054565195 SIM and is CLIP enabled will receive the following on the terminal:
RING
+CLIP: "",128,,128,"",1
RING
+CLIP: "",128,,128,"",1)

3-32

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

ath
NO CARRIER
OK
AT+CLIR=0
OK
atd054565195;//MO voice call
OK
(… calling …)
(… a G24 that has 054565195 SIM and is CLIP enabled will receive the following on the terminal:
RING
+CLIP: "054565006",129,,128,"",0
RING
+CLIP: "054565006",129,,128,"",0 …)
ath
NO CARRIER
OK

+CBST, Select Bearer Service Type
This command sets the GSM bearer service (data circuit duplex asynchronous and synchronous).
It chooses one of the bearer services, the data rate of the service (actually the modulation when
modem IWFs are used), and enables or disables the Radio Link Protocol.

Command
Type
Set

Syntax
AT+CBST=[[,<
name>
[,]]]

Response/Action

Remarks

OK
The Set command selects the bearer
+CME ERROR:  service  with data rate 

and the connection element  to be
used when data calls are originated
(refer to GSM 02.02). Values may also
be used during mobile terminated data
call setup, especially in the case of
single numbering scheme calls.
Note: For incoming calls, the bearer

service will be taken
automatically from incoming
parameters and not according
to the CBST Set command.
The G24 does not change the output,
but for incoming calls, the phone
works in automatic mode.
Read

AT+CBST?

+CBST:
,,
OK

Test

AT+CBST=?

+CBST: (list of
supported
s),(list of
supported
s),(list of
supported s)
OK

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

The Test command returns values
supported by the MA as compound
values.

3-33

Call Control

The following table shows the +CBST parameters.
Table 3-14: +CBST Parameters



Description
0 - Auto-bauding (automatic selection of the speed; this setting is possible in case of
3.1 kHz modem and non-transparent service)
6 - 4800 bps (V.32)
7 - 9600 bps (V.32)
14 - 14400 bps (V.34)
68 - 2400 bps (V.110 or X.31 flag stuffing)
70 - 4800 bps (V.110 or X.31 flag stuffing)
71 - 9600 bps (V.110 or X.31 flag stuffing)
75 - 14400 bps (V.110 or X.31 flag stuffing)
The default value is 7.
Note: Currently the G24 supports:

2 baud rates: 4800 and 9600 bps
2 protocols: V.110 and V.32


0 - Data circuit asynchronous (UDI or 3.1 kHz modem)
1 - Data circuit synchronous (UDI or 3.1 kHz modem)
The default value is 0.



0 - Transparent
1 - Non-transparent (default)

Example
AT+CBST=?
+CBST: (000,004,006,007,014,068,070,071,075),(000-001),(000-003)
OK
AT+CBST?
+CBST: 007,000,001
OK
AT+CBST=6
OK
AT+CBST?
+CBST: 006,000,001
OK

O, Return to Online Data State
This command returns the G24 from the Command mode to the Online Data mode and issues a
CONNECT or CONNECT  result code.
After dialing or answering (atd/ata commands and connect), the phone enters the Online Data
mode where it is able to transfer data, but not to enter AT commands.

3-34

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

The ESC command +++, transfers the phone to the Command mode (able to input AT commands,
while preserving the Data call). The O command returns the phone to the fully Online Data mode
(as it was before using the ESC command).
Note: The escape character '+' can be changed using the S2-register.

The time delay between consecutive escape characters is configured using the
S12-register.

Command
Type

Syntax

Execute

ATO

Response/Action
CONNECT
+CME ERROR:  If phone is not in Data
Call
NO CARRIER: If connection is not
successfully resumed.

Example
ATD035684072//Calling a remote modem - data call
CONNECT//G24 is in Data mode
//Escaping back to Command mode using the +++ sequence
OK
AT //G24 is in Command mode
OK
ATO //Returning to Data mode
CONNECT

&Q, Asynchronous Mode
This command selects the asynchronous mode, and has no effect.

Qn

Description

Q0

Normal asynchronous operation (no error correction)

Q5

Error corrected operation (default)

Q6

Normal asynchronous operation (no error correction)

+CHUP, Hang Up Call
This command causes the G24 to hang up the current GSM call.

Command Type
Set

December 31, 2007

Syntax
+CHUP

Response/Action

Remarks

OK
+CME ERROR 

The Set command hangs up the current
GSM call.

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-35

Call Control

+CSNS, Single Numbering Call Scheme
This command handles the selection of the bearer or teleservice to be used when a mobile
terminated single numbering scheme call is established. If the calling party specifies the required
bearer capability, this capability is used for the call setup attempt. If the calling party does not
specify the required bearer capability (for example, because the call originated in the PSTN), the
network attempts to determine it, as described below.
Some cellular networks use a multi-numbering scheme, where several mobile station ISDN
numbers, or MSISDNs, are associated with one IMSI in order to define the bearer capability by
the MSISDN. Each MSISDN is used for a different bearer capability. If the network uses a
multi-numbering scheme and the calling party has not specified the required bearer capability,
then the network uses the bearer capability associated with the called party MSISDN.
However, some networks omit the bearer capability associated with the called party MSISDN,
when this MSISDN is associated with voice service and the calling party has not specified the
required bearer capability (for example, because the call originated in the PSTN). In these cases,
the +CSNS command is used to select the desired bearer or teleservice for a single-numbering
scheme, in which one MSISDN is associated with each IMSI. The +CSNS command has a
default mode, so is not mandatory to set it.
If the network uses a single-numbering scheme and the calling party has not specified the
required service, then the network omits the bearer capability information.

Command
Type
Set

Syntax
+CSNS=[,]

Response/Action

Remarks

OK
The Set command selects the
+CME ERROR:  bearer or teleservice to be use

when a mobile-terminated
single numbering scheme call is
established.

3-36

Read

+CSNS?

+CSNS: 

The Read command displays the
currently active CSNS mode.

Test

+CSNS =?

+CSNS: (list of
supported mode>s),


The Test command displays the
list of supported CSNS modes.

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

The following table shows the AT+CSNS parameters.
Table 3-15: +CSNS Parameters


Description



CSNS mode:
0 - Voice (default)
2 - Fax (TS 62)
4 - Data



Defines for how long to save the new setting:
0
One shot (new setting is not saved)
1
CSNS mode is saved until new +CSNS set command is issued or next power
cycle, whichever occurs first.
2
CSNS mode is saved until new +CSNS set command is issued. The CSNS
mode will be stored in non-volatile memory and will be effective after power
cycle.

Note: Any mobile-terminated call lacking bearer capability information is handled according to

the current CSNS setting.
When  is set to data service, the parameter values set with the +CBST command
are used (Refer to “+CBST, Select Bearer Service Type” on page 3-33). If the +CBST
parameter is set to a value that is not applicable to single numbering calls, the G24 maps
the value to the matching one, according to the Mapping Table (Table 3-16).
The  selected in conjunction with  value ’2’ setting replaces 
setting in MS non-volatile memory of the bearer or teleservice to be used when mobile
terminated single numbering scheme call is established. Selected  is effective
until new CSNS set command is issued. After power cycle,  setting in MS
non-volatile memory returns to be effective ( selected in conjunction with
 value ’2’ or default ).
If CSNS set command is issued in conjunction with  value ’0’ (one shot), then
selected  is effective until any call indication is received (RING, CRING, CLCC,
and so on). Afterwards,  stored in MS non-volatile memory, returns to be
effective.
If CSNS set command is issued in conjunction with  value ’1’, then selected
CSNS  is effective until new CSNS set command is issued or until next power
cycle.
If CSNS set command is issued without parameter , the value of repeated is
assumed to be ’0’.

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-37

Call Control

The only +CBST parameter that needs mapping for mobile terminated calls is , as
described in the table below. The V.110 protocol is replaced by the analog protocol regardless of
the +CBST setting. All other parameters are set by the +CBST command.
Table 3-16: Mapping Table (V.34)
+CBST setting

Mapped value for mobile terminated call

0

autobauding

4

2400 bps (V.22bis)

6

4800 bps (V.32)

7

9600 bps (V.32)

14

14400 bps (V.34)

68

2400 bps (V.110 or X.31 flag stuffing)

70

4800 bps (V.110 or X.31 flag stuffing)

71

9600 bps (V.110 or X.31 flag stuffing)

75

14400 bps (V.110 or X.31 flag stuffing)

Note: CSNS has read-only access to CBST data.

+MDC, Selection of Desired Message to Be Displayed Upon
Connection of a Voice Call
This AT command enables you to select the desired messages to be displayed upon connection of
a voice call with a remote party. The OK and CONNECT messages are available.

Command Type

3-38

Syntax

Response/Action

Remarks

Set

+MDC=

OK
or:
ERROR

The Set command selects which of the
supported messages will be displayed
upon connection of a voice call.
 Command Parameters:
0 - Display OK on voice call
connection
1 - Display CONNECT on voice call
connection
Default Values:
Power Up - As previously saved in
NVM FLEX bit
0 - Before Set command is first used

Read

+MDC?

++MDC: 
OK

The Read command should return the
current selection of .

Test

+MDC=?

+MDC: (list of
supported s)
OK

The Test command returns the possible
 values.

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

Example
AT+MDC=?
+MDC: (0-1)
OK
AT+MDC=1
OK
ATD;
OK
CONNECT
AT+MDC?
+MDC: 1
OK
AT+MDC=0
OK
ATD;
OK
OK
AT+MDC?
+MDC: 0
OK

+CTFR1, Divert an Incoming Call When User Busy
This command terminates an incoming call and diverts the caller to the number previously
defined in CCFC, or to a voice mail if one exists for the subscriber. This is done by sending a
user-defined User Busy message to the network.

Command Type
Set

Syntax
+CTFR1

Response/Action

Remarks

OK and NO CARRIER The Set command will hand up
(terminate) the incoming call, causing
or:
the network to divert the incoming call
+CME ERROR: 

to the number that was set by the
CCFC command for "User Busy", or
the voice mail, if one exists for the
subscriber

Example
RING //Incoming call indication
AT+CTFR1
OK
NO CARRIER
AT+CTFR1 //When an active call exists and another call is waiting
OK
NO CARRIER
AT+CTFR1 //When there is no incoming call or waiting call
+CME ERROR: operation not allowed

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-39

Call Control

+MFIC, Filtering Incoming Calls
This command instructs the G24 to query or set Filtering Incoming Calls parameters. The
command is a "none basic" command and will not work if SIM card is not present or if SIM card
is not in READY state.
MFIC parameters are saved after power cycle.
This feature is not active by default, however, changing the FLEX can activate it.
Command
Type

Syntax

Response/Action

Remarks

Set

+MFIC=[[,[
,[,]]]]

OK
or:
+CME ERROR: 

The set command defines the
Incoming Calls Filtering parameters this command enable/disable the
filtering, set the search phone book,
define the respond type and set the
search phone book entries range.
Each of the parameters has its own
default value, which will take effect if
it is omitted from the command line. In
case the parameter is omitted with its
pre - leading comma, then the already
set value will not be changed to its
default. See examples bellow.
One exceptional is the dealing with the
 parameter. When
changing the search  without also
changing/setting the , there
is a possibility that the already set
 is too big for the new
search . For example, when
changing from "MT" to "SM"/"ME"
while the  is equal to 235.
The "SM"/"ME" phone books may not
hold so many entries. In such cases the
new search  maximum size will
be set as the new value of the
.

Read

+ MFIC?

+MFIC=,,< The read command returns the current
response>, MFIC set parameters value.
OK

Test

3-40

+ MFIC=?

+MFIC: (list of
The test command returns the possible
supported s),(list ranges of MFIC parameters.
of supported s),(list
of supported
s),(list of
supported )
OK
or:
+CME ERROR: 

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

The following table shows the +MFIC parameters.
Table 3-17: +MFIC Parameters


Description



This parameter hold the state of the feature:
0
Filtering is enabled
1
Filtering is disabled (default value)



Sets the phonebook to be searched when there is an incoming call:
SM Search will be done on SIM phonebook only. (Default value)
ME Search will be done on G24 internal phone book only.
MT Search will be done on both G24 internal and SIM phone books.



Sets the response that will be sent to DTE when an incoming call is not filtered:
0
When MT call caller info exists in one of the first  places on 
then the response for received voice call will be "RINGCENTER" (Default value).
1
For all received voice call the response will be "RING".



This parameter sets the number of phone book entries that will be searched when an
incoming voice call is received. The range always starts from 1. Therefore, the last
phone book entry to be searched should be inserted in the command line. This is an
integer parameter with the default value of 50.

Example
AT+MFIC=?
+MFIC: (0-1),("SM","ME","MT"),(0-1),(1-750)
OK
AT+MFIC=0,"SM",0,50// Enable filtering SIM phone book up to first 50 entries.
OK
AT+MFIC?
+MFIC: 0,"SM",0,50// Read MFIC parameters
OK
AT+MFIC=1// Disable the MFIC feature.
OK
AT+MFIC=0,"SM",0,50// Enable filtering of SIM phone book entries.
OK
AT+MFIC=1,"MT",1,750// Disable filtering of SIM & ME phone book entries.
OK
AT+MFIC?
+MFIC: 1,"MT",1,750// Read MFIC parameters.
OK
AT+MFIC=0// Enable the MFIC feature.
OK
AT+MFIC?
+MFIC: 0,"MT",1,750// Read MFIC parameters.
OK
AT+MFIC=1,,1,75// Disable filtering & set filtered phone book to be the default one.
OK
AT+MFIC?
+MFIC: 1,"SM",1,75// Read MFIC parameters.
OK
AT+MFIC=1,"SM"// Change the response and PB range to default.
OK

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-41

Call Control

+MHUP, Motorola Hung UP call
This command hung up specific call or all calls, and report a specific disconnect cause to the NW.
Command
Type

Syntax

Response/Action

Remarks

Set

AT+MHUP=
[,]

OK
or:
+CME ERROR: 

Test

AT+MHUP=?

+MHUP:(1,16,17,18,27,3 Show list of supported 's and
list of supported 's.
1),(0-7)
OK

The following table shows the +MHUP parameters.
Table 3-18: +MHUP Parameters


Description



Cause description, send to the NW in the "disconnect" message.
1
"Unassigned (unallocated) number"
16
"Normal call clearing"
17
"User busy"
18
"No user responding"
27
"Destination out of order"
31
"Normal, unspecified"



Index of the call id (same as  in +CLCC command)
0
All calls (default).
1-7 Specific call id.

Example
AT+MHUP=?
+MHUP: (1,16,17,18,27,31),(0-7)
OK
AT+MHUP = 16,3//Hung up call #3, and send cause "Normal call clearing"
OK
AT+MHUP = 17//Hung up all calls, and send cause "User busy"
OK
AT+MHUP = 17,0//Hung up all calls, and send cause "User busy"
OK

3-42

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

+MVC, Motorola Vocoders Configuration
This AT command is used to choose and configure the priority order of the supported voice
codecs (vocoders).
The phone will restart 10 seconds after the set command execution completed. Changes take
effect after restart.
Command
Type

Syntax

Response/Action

Remarks

Set

AT+MVC=[,[,<
p2>[,[,[,]
]]]]

OK
or:
+CME ERROR: 

The command will save new vocoders
configuration or restore the default
configuration, wait 10 sec and restart
the phone.

Read

AT+MVC?

+MVC:
The command will read the current
[,[,[, vocoders values.
[,]]]]
OK
or:
+CME ERROR: 

Test

AT+MVC=?

+MVC:
(0-1),(1-5) ,(1-5) ,(1-5)
,(1-5) ,(1-5)
OK

The command shall return the list of
supported
,,,,,
values.

The following table shows the +MVC parameters.
Table 3-19: +MVC Parameters


Description



0
1

Restore default vocoder configuration.
Set vocoders and their priority order.

,,
,,

1
2
3
4
5

GSM full rate speech version 1.
GSM half rate speech version 1.
GSM full rate speech version 2 (EFR).
GSM full rate speech version 3 (AMR Full Rate).
GSM half rate speech version 3 (AMR Half Rate).

Example
AT+MVC=0
OK
AT+MVC=1,1,3,5
OK
// Delay 10 sec. Restart.
AT+MVC?
+MVC: 1,2,3
OK
AT+MVC=?
+MVC: (0-1),(1-5), (1-5), (1-5), (1-5), (1-5)
OK

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-43

Call Control

The meaning of the AT+MVC=1,1,3,5 command is:
The modem is able to support GSM full rate speech version 1, GSM full rate speech version 2
(EFR), GSM half rate speech version 3 (AMR Half Rate) only:
• GSM full rate speech version 1 is the first priority

• GSM full rate speech version 2 (EFR) is the second priority
• GSM half rate speech version 3 (AMR Half Rate) is the third priority
The GSM half rate speech version 1 and GSM full rate speech version 3 (AMR Full Rate) will not
be supported by the modem.

+MTTY, Motorola TTY Configuration
This AT command is used to enable or disable TTY (Tele Typewriter) support in G24 modules.
Note: Tele-typewriter or Teletype, a typewriter with an electronic communication. TTY is an

electronic device for text communication via a telephone line, used when one or more of
the parties have hearing or speech difficulties.

Command
Type

3-44

Syntax

Response/Action

Remarks

Set

AT+MTTY=

OK
or:
+CME ERROR: 

The SET command is used for setting
the current TTY mode.

Read

AT+MTTY?

+ MTTY : 
OK
or:
+CME ERROR: 

The READ command returns the
current TTY mode .

Test

AT+MTTY=?

+MTTY : (0-3)
OK
or:
+CME ERROR: 

The Test command returns the possible
value’s range.

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

The following table shows the +MTTY parameters.
Table 3-20: +MTTY Parameters



Description
0
1
2
3

Normal voice mode.
Full TTY mode (both uplink and downlink support TTY data; used when both
side parties are deaf).
VCO mode (Voice Carry Over- uplink is voice active downlink is TTY).
HCO mode (Hearing Carry Over-downlink is voice active uplink is TTY).

The default value:

• On Power Up - as previously saved in FLEX bytes.
• Before set command is first used, mode is set to Normal voice mode.
Notes:

VCO: Voice Carry Over is intended for people who cannot hear but are able to speak
clearly. During a VCO relay call, the Deaf or Hard-of-Hearing caller speaks directly to
the person they are conversing with. When that person responds, a Communication
Assistant (CA) will type back exactly what is said and it will appear on the screen of your
TTY or VCO phone.
HCO: Hearing Carry Over allows Speech Disabled callers who can hear well on the
telephone to listen directly to the person they are talking with. The Speech Disabled Relay
user types his or her part of the conversation on a TTY. A Communication Assistant (CA)
then speaks the typed conversation, word for word, to the standard telephone user.
Figure 3-1 shows the TTY hardware configuration.

AT Commands
Terminal

Communication
Path

G24/Telephone

G24
Headset
Connection

TTY Terminal 1

TTY Terminal 2

Note: TTY terminal 1 is connected to
G24 via headset connector.
Figure 3-1: TTY Hardware Configuration
Example
AT+MTTY=?
+MTTY: (0-3)
OK
AT+MTTY=1

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-45

Call Control

OK
AT+MTTY?
+MTTY: 1
OK

Call Status Messages
+CPAS, Phone Activity Status
This command displays the current activity status of the G24, for example, call in progress, or
ringing.

Command Type

Syntax

Response/Action

Execute/Read

AT+CPAS
AT+CPAS?

+CPAS: 
OK
or:
+CME ERROR: 

Test

AT+CPAS=?

+CPAS: (list of
supported s)
OK
or:
+CME ERROR: 

Remarks
The Execute and Read commands
return the activity status  of the
G24. They can be used to interrogate
the G24.

The following table shows the +CPAS parameters.
Table 3-21: +CPAS Parameters



Description
0 - Ready - The G24 allows commands from the terminal
2 - Unknown - The G24 is not guaranteed to respond to instructions
3 - Ringing (MT calls) - The G24 is ready for commands from the terminal, but the
ringer is active
4 - Call in progress - The G24 is ready for commands from the terminal, but a call is
in progress

Example
AT+CPAS
+CPAS: 0
OK
AT+CPAS=?
+CPAS: (0,2-4)
OK
AT+CPAS?

3-46

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

+CPAS: 4
OK
AT+CPAS//Voice call active state
+CPAS: 4
OK

+CLCC, List Current Calls
This command displays a list of all current G24 calls and their statuses, and also enables/disables
the unsolicited indication of the call list. (If no calls are received, no information response is sent
to the terminal.)
If the command succeeds but no calls are available, no information response is sent to the
terminal.
The maximum number of simultaneous multiparty calls is 5+1 (5 in active group and 1 on hold).

Command
Type

Syntax

Response/Action

Remarks

Set

AT+CLCC=

OK
or:
+CME ERROR: 

Execute

AT+CLCC

+CLCC: ,
,, ,
the receiving of data about
[,,, current calls.
]
[+ CLCC:
,,,
,[,
,,]
[…]]
OK

Read

AT+CLCC?

+CLCC: 
OK
or:
+CME ERROR 

Test

AT+CLCC=?

+CLCC: (List of supported
s)
OK
or:
+CME ERROR 

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

The Set command enables/disables
unsolicited indications.

The Read command returns the call
status.

3-47

Call Control

The following table shows the +CLCC parameters.
Table 3-22: +CLCC Parameters


Description



0
Disable CLCC unsolicited indication
1
Enable CLCC unsolicited indication
The default value is 0.



Integer type, call identification number



0
1



The state of the call
0
Active
1
Held
2
Dialing (MO call)
3
Alerting (MO call)
4
Incoming (MT call)
5
Waiting (MT call)
6
Released



Bearer/Teleservice
0
Voice Call
1
Data
2
Fax



Multiparty status
0
Call is not part of a multiparty call
1
Call is one of multiparty call parties



Phone number in the format specified by .
Contains a string of up to 32 characters.



Phone number display format.
Type of address octet in integer format (refer to GSM 04.08 [8] subclause 10.5.4.7)
129
Local number
145
International number with access character +



Text representation of the phone book entry.
String type alphanumeric representation of  corresponding to the entry
found in the phone book.
Contains a string of up to 20 characters.

Mobile originated call (MO)
Mobile terminated call (MT)

Note: When a mobile-originated call is routed to PSTN (PABX), no ALERT indication is

prompted.
Example
AT+CLCC=?
+CLCC: (0,1)
OK
AT+CLCC
+CLCC: 1,0,0,0,0,"01256316830",129,"Shmuel"
OK
AT+CLCC?

3-48

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

+CLCC: 0
OK
AT+CLCC=1//Example with unsolicited indication
OK
ATD055490698;
OK
+CLCC: 1,0,2,0,0,"055490698",129,"Alpha"
+CLCC: 1,0,3,0,0,"055490698",129," Alpha "
OK
+CLCC: 1,0,0,0,0,"055490698",129," Alpha "
ATH
NO CARRIER
OK
+CLCC: 1,0,6,0,0,"055490698",129," Alpha

+MCST, Call Status Messages
This command displays the current state of the call processing, and also enables/disables the
unsolicited indication of any change in the call processing state.

Command Type

Syntax

Response/Action

Remarks

Set

+MCST=

OK
The Set command Enables/disables the
unsolicited call status messages.
or:
+CME ERROR: 

Read

+MCST?

+MCST: 
OK

The Read command returns the current
call processing state.

+MCST Indication
When a change in call state occurs and the +MCST is set to n=1 the G24 will give the following
indication:
+MCST: 

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-49

Call Control

+MCST Parameters
The following table shows the +MCST parameters.
Table 3-23: +MCST Parameters


Description



0 - Disable MCST unsolicited indication
1 - Enable MCST unsolicited indication



1 - Idle call state
2 - Single incoming call
3 - Single call active
4 - Multi-party call active
5 - Single call held
6 - Multi-party call held
7 - Dual call (fully connected active call and held call)
8 - Dual multi-party call active
9 - Dual multi-party call held
10 - Single active call plus call waiting
11 - Multi-party call active plus call waiting
12 - Single call held plus call waiting
13 - Multi-party call held plus call waiting
14 - Dual calls plus call waiting
15 - Dual multi-party calls active plus call waiting
16 - Dual multi-party calls held plus call waiting
17 - Call control busy
64 - Calling
68 - No Service
69 - No Redial
72 - Security Fail



Phone number display format.
Type of address octet in integer format
(refer to GSM 04.08 [8] subclause 10.5.4.7)
129
Local number
145
International number with access character +



Text representation of the phone book entry.
String type alphanumeric representation of  corresponding to the entry
found in the phone book.
Contains a string of up to 20 characters.

Example
AT+MCST?
+MCST: // 
AT+MCST=1
OK
atd035684423;
+MCST: 17
OK
+MCST: 17
+MCST: 255
OK

3-50

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

+MCST: 3
+MCST: 17
NO CARRIER
+MCST: 1

+TCLCC, List Current Calls
This command displays a list of all current G24 calls and their statuses, and also enables/disables
the unsolicited indication of the call list.
This command is operational only with specific Telematics products.
Operation of this command is flex dependant.

Command
Type

Syntax

Response/Action

Remarks

Set

AT+TCLCC=

OK
Set unsolicited reporting on/off.
or:
+CME ERROR: 

Read

AT+TCLCC?

+TCLCC:
or:
+CME ERROE:

Execute

AT+TCLCC

+TCLCC:
Read the current call status.
,,
,,,[]
[,,][<
CR>+TCLCC:
,,
,,,[]
[,,][…
]]
OK
or:
+CME ERROE:

Test

AT+TCLCC=?

+TCLCC: (List of
supporteds)
OK
or:
+CME ERROE:

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

Read the current setting.

Show list of supported modes.

3-51

Call Control

The following table shows the +TCLCC parameters.
Table 3-24: +TCLCC Parameters



Description
0 Disable TCLCC unsolicited indication (Default).
1 Enable TCLCC unsolicited indication.



Integer type, call identification number.



0 Mobile originated call (MO)
1 Mobile terminated call (MT).



The state of the call
0 Idle
1 Calling (MO call)
2 Connecting (MO call)
3 Active
4 Hold
5 Waiting (MT call)
6 Alerting (MT call)
7 Busy



Bearer/Teleservice
1 Voice Call
2 Data
3 Fax
9 Unknown



Multiparty status
0 Call is not part of a multiparty call.
1 Call is one of multiparty call parties.



See Table 3-197.



Phone number in the format specified by .
Contains a quoted string of up to 32 characters.



7 bits Phone number display format.
Type of address octet in integer format (refer to GSM 04.08 subclause 10.5.4.7).

Example
AT+TCLCC=1
OK
AT+TCLCC?
+TCLCC: 1
OK
ATD035659801; // MO Call
OK
+TCLCC: 1,0,1,1,0,,"035659801",1
+TCLCC: 1,0,2,1,0,,"035659801",1
OK
+TCLCC: 1,0,3,1,0,,"035659801",1
AT+CHLD=2

3-52

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

OK
+TCLCC: 1,0,4,1,0,,"035659801",1 // Call on hold
ATD0502147270; // Dial to another phone
OK
+TCLCC: 2,0,1,1,0,,"0502147270",1
+TCLCC: 2,0,2,1,0,,"0502147270",1
OK
+TCLCC: 2,0,3,1,0,,"0502147270",1
AT+CHLD=3
OK
+TCLCC: 1,0,3,1,1,,"035659801",1
+TCLCC: 2,0,3,1,1,,"0502147270",1
ATH
NO CARRIER
+TCLCC: 1,0,0,1,0,16,"035659801",1
NO CARRIER
OK
+TCLCC: 2,0,0,1,0,16,"0502147270",1// MT Call
+TCLCC: 1,1,6,1,0,,"0502147270",3
RING
RING
ATA
OK
+TCLCC: 1,1,3,1,0,,"0502147270",3
ATH
NO CARRIER
OK
+TCLCC: 1,1,0,1,0,16,"0502147270",3

+MNTFY, Motorola NoTiFY Indication
This command enables/disables unsolicited report of NOTIFY indication arrived from the NW.
The control value resets after power cycle.

Command
Type
Set

Syntax
AT+MNTFY=

Unsolicited
Report

Response/Action

Remarks

OK
Set unsolicited reporting
enable/disable.
or:
+CME ERROR: 
+MNTFY:,


Show unsolicited NOTIFY report.

Read

AT+MNTFY?

+MNTFY: 
OK

Read the current setting.

Test

AT+MNTFY=?

+MNTFY: (List of
supported cntrl>s)
OK

Show list of supported modes.

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-53

Call Control

The following table shows the +MNTFY parameters.
Table 3-25: +MNTFY Parameters


Description



A unique number that identifies a control mode of unsolicited NOTIFY report:
0 - Disable.
1 - Enabled



Call identification number:
1-7



A unique number that identifies a notify description:
0 - Suspend.
1 - Resumed.
2 - Bearer Change.

Example
AT+MNTFY=?
+MNTFY: (0,1)
OK
AT+MNTFY? // after power cycle
+MNTFY: 0 // disabled
OK
ATD035684349;
OK
OK
ATD035619942;
OK
OK
AT+CLCC
+CLCC: 1,0,1,0,0,"035684349",129,""
+CLCC: 2,0,0,0,0,"035619942",129,""
OK
AT+MNTFY?
+MNTFY: 0
OK // phone call #2 is suspend & resume call,
//no unsolicited report has done.
AT+MNTFY=1// enabled.
OK
AT+MNTFY?
+MNTFY: 1
OK
+MNTFY: 2,0 // phone call #2 is suspend call
+MNTFY: 2,1 // phone call #2 is resumed call

3-54

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

Call Advice of Charge Commands
This set of commands enables GSM operators to offer Advice of Charge (AoC) services that
calculate call charges. These charges are expressed in terms of home units.

+CAOC, Advice of Charge
This command displays information about the cost of calls. If supported, this command also
activates/deactivates unsolicited event reporting of the CCM (Current Call Meter) information.
The unsolicited report +CCCM: is sent when the CCM value changes, but not more than
once every 10 seconds.
Note: The CCM value depends on the network properties (charge for MO or/and MT calls).

There are two states in which the command can be activated:

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-55

Call Control

•In IDLE state - returns the last call cost.
•In a voice/data state - returns the accumulated cost, including the current call.

Command
Type

Syntax

Response/Action

Remarks

Set

+CAOC[=]

OK
or:
[+CAOC:]
or:
+CME ERROR:

Read

+CAOC?
+CAOC

+CAOC: 
The Read command returns the current
CAOC mode.
OK
OK
or:
[+CAOC: ]
or:
+CME ERROR: 

Test

+CAOC=?

+CAOC: (list of
supported s)
OK

The Set command returns the CCM
value from the G24, or
activates/deactivates unsolicited
reports.

The Test command returns the
supported mode values.

The following table shows the +CAOC parameters.
Table 3-26: +CAOC Parameters



Description
0
1
2

Queries the CCM value
Deactivates unsolicited reporting of the CCM value
Activates unsolicited reporting of the CCM value

Note: : String type value representing three bytes of the current call meter value in

hexadecimal format (for example, "00001E" indicates decimal value 30).
Example
Example with prepaid SIM card with 56700.00L prepaid before the test.
AT
OK
AT+CAOC=2
OK
atd+97254565190;
OK
OK
+CCCM: "000000"
+CCCM: "000006"
AT+CAOC

3-56

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

+CAOC: "000009"
OK
+CCCM: "00000e"
+CCCM: "000016"
AT+CAOC
+CAOC: "00001d"
OK
+CCCM: "00001e"
+CCCM: "000027"
AT+CAOC=0
+CAOC: "00002d"
OK
AT+CAOC=2
OK
+CCCM: "00003d"
AT+CAOC
+CAOC: "00003f"
OK
+CCCM: "000046"
AT
+CCCM: "00004e"
+CAOC
+CAOC: "00004f"
OK
+CCCM: "000056"
AT+CAOC
+CAOC: "00005d"
OK
+CCCM: "00005e"
NO CARRIER
AT+CAOC
+CAOC: "000066"
OK
//567 (prepaid SIM value) - 102 (price per call unit by provider) x 66 (call units) = 465 left in prepaid SIM
OK

There is now 46500.00L prepaid remaining on the SIM card.
Note: The above example shows first time activation of the AOC feature using the G24.

Therefore, the accumulated cost is equal to the current call cost.

+CACM, Accumulated Call Meter
This command resets the Advice of Charge accumulated call meter value in the SIM file,
EFACM. ACM contains the total number of home units for both the current call and preceding
calls.

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-57

Call Control

Refer to “+CAMM, Accumulated Call Meter Maximum”, page 3-58.

Command
Type
Set

Syntax

Response/Action

+CACM=

Remarks

OK
The Set command resets the
+CME ERROR:  accumulated call meter value. SIM

PIN2 is required.

Read

+CACM?

+CACM: 
The Read command displays the
+CME ERROR:  current value of ACM.

Test

+CACM=?

OK

The Test command indicates whether
the +CACM command is functioning.

The following table shows the +CACM parameters.
Table 3-27: +CACM Parameters


Description



SIM PIN2 password
Maximum string length is 8 characters. If this value is exceeded, the command
terminates in an error. If PIN2 is incorrect, "+CME ERROR: incorrect password" is
displayed.



Accumulated call meter maximum value (similar to CCM; Refer to “+CAOC, Advice
of Charge”, page 3-55). The default is 0.

String type; three bytes of the current call meter value in hexadecimal format (for
example, 00001E indicates a decimal value of 30). Value is given in home units; bytes
are similarly coded as the ACMmax value in the SIM.

Example
AT+CACM=?
OK
AT+CACM?
+CACM:"000000"
OK
AT+CACM="2222"
OK

+CAMM, Accumulated Call Meter Maximum
This command sets the Advice of Charge accumulated call meter maximum value in the SIM file,
EFACMmax. ACMmax contains the maximum number of home units the subscriber is able to
consume. When the ACM (Refer to “+CACM, Accumulated Call Meter”, page 3-57) reaches
ACMmax, additional calls (mobile-originated and mobile-terminated calls that incur charges) are
prohibited, except for emergency calls. Refer to GSM 02.24.

3-58

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

Command Type
Set

Syntax
+CAMM=[,]

Response/Action

Remarks

OK
The Set command sets the
+CME ERROR:  accumulated call meter maximum

value. SIM PIN2 is required. The value
that is set remains after a power cycle.
Note: This command is activated if

Advice of Charge is supported
by the network.
Read

+CAMM?

+CAMM:  The Read command displays the
+CME ERROR:  current value of ACMmax.

Test

+CAMM=?

OK

The Test command indicates whether
the +CAMM command is functioning.

The following table shows the +CAMM parameters.
Table 3-28: +CAMM Parameters


Description



Accumulated call meter maximum value (similar to CCM; Refer to “+CAOC, Advice
of Charge”, page 3-55)
ccm>
String type; three bytes of the current call meter value in hexadecimal format (for
example, 00001E indicates a decimal value of 30). Value is given in home units; bytes
are similarly coded as the ACMmax value in the SIM.
Range is from 00001 to FFFFFF.
0
Disables ACMmax (default)



SIM PIN2 password
Maximum string length is 8 characters. If this value is exceeded, the command
terminates in an error. If PIN2 is incorrect, "+CME ERROR: incorrect password" is
displayed.

Example
AT+CAMM=?
OK
AT+CAMM="FFFFFF","2222"
OK
AT+CAMM?
+CAMM: "FFFFFF"
OK

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-59

Call Control

+CPUC, Price per Unit and Currency Table
This command sets the parameters of the Advice of Charge-related price per unit and currency
table found in the SIM file, EFPUCT. PUCT information is used to convert the home units (used
in +CAOC, +CACM and +CAMM) into currency units.

Command
Type
Set

Syntax

Response/Action

+CPUC=,
,

Remarks

OK
The Set command sets the price per
+CME ERROR:  unit and the currency table. SIM PIN2

is required. The new value is retained
after a power cycle.

Read

+CPUC?

+CPUC:
The Read command displays the
current price per unit and currency
,
+CME ERROR:  table.

Test

+CPUC=?

OK

The Test command indicates whether
the +CPUC command is functioning.

The following table shows the +CPUC parameters.
Table 3-29: +CPUC Parameters


Description



Currency code character set (3 characters) defined by +CSCS command. (Refer to
“+CSCS, Select Terminal Character Set”, page 3-4.)
If the string begins with an alphanumeric character, it may be entered with or without
quotation marks, for example, "GBP", "DEM".



Price per unit
A dot is used as a decimal separator (precision of 1/1000; 15 digit maximum), for
example,"2.667".
[See notes below]



SIM PIN2 password
Maximum string length is 8 characters. If this value is exceeded, the command
terminates in an error. If PIN2 is incorrect, "+CME ERROR: incorrect password" is
displayed.

Example
AT+CPUC=?
OK
AT+CPUC="GBP","0.125","2222"
OK
AT+CPUC?
+CPUC: "GBP","0.125"

3-60

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

OK

Note: If  contains a dot, a maximum of three digits may appear after the dot, otherwise

an error is generated. For example, if =0.61, the Read command displays 0.610.
=1.2345 terminates in an error.
If  does not contain a dot, the number is divided by 1000. For example, if =1,
the Read command displays 0.001.
Due to storage constraints, the  value is limited to a range of 0 to 4095. Values
beyond this range may result in rounding errors. For example, if =4095, the Read
command displays 4.095. However, if =4096, the Read command displays 4.090
(the last digit is replaced by 0). If =456789, the Read command displays 456.000.

+CR, Service Reporting Control
This command controls whether or not the extended format of an outgoing call is displayed or
not. The +CR indication is sent from the G24 to the terminal whenever a data call is initiated by
the G24.

Command Type

Syntax

Response/Action

Remarks

Set

+CR=[]

OK

The Set command enables/disables the
extended format of an outgoing data
call. When enabled, the outgoing data
call is indicated to the terminal through
the unsolicited result code
+CR:. When the command is
disabled, no +CR is sent to the
terminal.

Read

+CR?

+CR:

The Read command displays the
current service reporting control
setting.

Test

+CR=?

+CR:

The Test command displays the list of
supported CR modes.

The following table shows the +CR parameters.
Table 3-30: +CR Parameters


Description



0
1



Type of outgoing data calls:
ASYNC - Asynchronous transparent
SYNC - Synchronous transparent
REL ASYNC - Asynchronous non-transparent
REL SYNC - Synchronous non-transparent

December 31, 2007

Extended format disabled (default)
Extended format enabled

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-61

Call Control

Example
AT+CR=1//Enable reporting
OK
ATD1234567890
+CR: REL ASYNC

Supplementary Services
This set of commands enables control over supplementary service notifications, including
Structured and Unstructured Supplementary Service Data (USSD) data.

+CSSN, Supplementary Service Notifications
This command handles the enabling and disabling of supplementary service-related,
network-initiated, notifications.

Command
Type

Set

Syntax
+CSSN=[[,]]

Response/Action

Remarks

OK
The Set command enables/disables the
+CME ERROR:  display of notification result codes to

the TE.
When =1 and a supplementary
service notification is received after a
mobile-originated call setup, the
+CSSI: notification is sent to the TE
before any other mobile-originated call
setup result codes. When several
different notifications are received
from the network, each of them
receives its own +CSSI result code.
When =1 and a supplementary
service notification is received during
a mobile-terminated call setup or
during a call, or when a forward check
supplementary service notification is
received, the unsolicited result code
+CSSU: is sent to the TE. In case of a
mobile-terminated call setup, a CSSU
is sent after every +CLIP result code
(“+CLIP, Calling Line Identification”
on page 3-21). When several different
events are received from the network,
each of them receives its own +CSSU
result code.
Note: The values for  and 

are not saved after power
cycle.

3-62

Read

+CSSN?

+CSSN: ,

The Read command displays the
current supplementary service
notification setting.

Test

+CSSN=?

+CSSN: (0-1), (0-1)

The Test command displays the list of
supported CSSN values.

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

The following table shows the +CSSN parameters.
Table 3-31: +CSSN Parameters


Description



Sets/displays the +CSSI result code presentation status. This value must be specified.
0
Disable (default)
1
Enable



Sets/displays the +CSSU result code presentation status. This value is optional, but
cannot be specified without .
0
Disable (default)
1
Enable

Table 3-32: +CSSI Notification Values
Value

Description

G24 Support

0

Unconditional call forwarding is
active

Yes

1

Some conditional call forwarding
is active

Yes

2

Call has been forwarded

Yes

3

Call is waiting

Yes (GSM only)

4

CUG call ( is present)

Yes

5

Outgoing calls are barred

Yes

6

Incoming calls are barred

Yes

7

CLIR suppression rejected

Yes

8

Call has been deflected

No

Table 3-33: +CSSU Notification Values
Value

Description

G24 Support

0

This is a forwarded call
(mobile-terminated call setup).

Yes

1

CUG call ( is present;
mobile-terminated call setup).

Yes

2

Call has been put on hold (during
a voice call)

Yes

3

Call has been retrieved (during a
voice call)

Yes

4

Multiparty call has been entered
(during a voice call)

Yes

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-63

Call Control

Table 3-33: +CSSU Notification Values (Cont.)
Value

Description

G24 Support

5

Call on hold has been released
(during a voice call; not a
supplementary service
notification)

Yes

6

Forward check supplementary
service message received (can be
received at any time)

Yes

7

Call is being connected with the
remote party in an alerted state
using an explicit call transfer
operation (during a voice call).

Yes

8

Call has been connected with the
other remote party using an
explicit call transfer operation
(during a voice call or during
mobile-terminated call setup).
Number and subaddress
parameters may be present:
String type phone
number of format defined by

Type of address octet in
integer format (refer to GSM
04.08 [8], subclause 10.5.4.7)
String type subaddress
of format defined by 
Type of subaddress
octet in integer format (refer to
GSM 04.08 [8], subclause
10.5.4.8)

Yes

9

Deflected call
(mobile-terminated call setup)

No

Example
AT+CSSN=?// test command
+CSSN: (0-1),(0-1)
OK
AT+CSSN=0,0// disable both options
OK
AT+CSSN=1,0// set n value as enabled, m disabled
OK
AT+CSSN?
+CSSN: 1,0// display the current n & m values
OK
+CSSI: 1// displayed after mobile originated call setup of call forward and n enable
+CSSU: 2//displayed when a call has been placed on hold (during the call) using the +CHLD AT command
and m enable

3-64

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

+CUSD, Unstructured Supplementary Service Data
This command allows control of Unstructured Supplementary Service Data (USSD), according to
GSM 02.90.
Both network and mobile initiated operations are supported. Parameter  is used to
disable/enable the presentation of an unsolicited result code (USSD response from the network,
or network initiated operation) +CUSD: [,,] to the TE. In addition, value =2
is used to cancel an ongoing USSD session. When  is given, a mobile initiated USSD-string
or a response USSD-string to a network initiated operation is sent to the network. The response
USSD-string from the network is returned in a subsequent unsolicited +CUSD result code.

Command
Type
Set

Syntax

Response/Action

AT+CUSD=[[,[,]]]

Unsolicited
Report

Remarks

OK
The Set command enables/disables the
display of the unsolicited result code.
or:
+CME ERROR: 
+CUSD:
[,[,]]]

The USSD response from the network.

Read

+CUSD?

+CUSD: 
The Read command displays the
current value of .
or:
+CME ERROR: 

Test

+CUSD=?

+CUSD: (list of
The Test command displays the
supported values of .
supported s)
or:
+CME ERROR: 

The following table shows the +CUSD parameters.
Table 3-34: +CUSD Parameters


Description



0
1
2



String type USSD-string (when  parameter is not given, network is not
interrogated):
If  indicates that GSM 03.38 [25] default alphabet is used:
• If TE character set other than "HEX" (refer command Select TE Character Set
+CSCS): ME/TA converts GSM alphabet into current TE character set according to
rules of GSM 07.05 [24] Annex A.
• If TE character set is "HEX": ME/TA converts each 7-bit character of GSM
alphabet into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. character ? (GSM
23) is presented as 17 (IRA 49 and 55)).
If  indicates that 8-bit data coding scheme is used: ME/TA converts each 8-bit
octet into two IRA character long hexadecimal number (e.g. octet with integer value
42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)).

December 31, 2007

Disable the result code presentation in the TA.
Enable the result code presentation in the TA.
Cancel session (not applicable to read command response).

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-65

Call Control

Table 3-34: +CUSD Parameters (Cont.)


Description



GSM 03.38 - Cell Broadcast Data Coding Scheme in integer format. The supported
value are:
17 - USC2 Language Indicator. (The first character in a USC2 Lang IND has the
language ID in it. This situation is not defined by the GSM 7.07 or the 3GPP 27.007
so the assuming that the first character should have the correctly formatted and
packed language ID already in it).
72 - USC2 (16 bit).
68 - 8 bit.
Each other value except of 96, 80, and 240 are 7 bit.
Not supported values are:
96, 80, 240
The default value is 15 (7 bit).



0
1
2
3
4
5

3-66

No further user action required (network initiated USSD-Notify, or no
further information needed after mobile Initiated operation).
Further user action required (network initiated USSD-Request, or
further information needed after mobile initiated operation).
USSD terminated by network. the reason for the termination is indicated
by the index, as described in Table 3-35.
Other local client has responded.
Operation not supported.
Network time out.

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

Example
AT+CUSD=1,"*00*0549598743#"
+CUSD: 0,"Connecting...",15
+CUSD: 0,"Connected",15
+CLCC: 1,1,4,0,0,"0545550099",129,"" >Call from USSD server
RING
ATA > answer to the server (when answered, the server call to 0549598743)
OK
+CLCC: 1,1,0,0,0,"0545550099",129,""
NO CARRIER
+CLCC: 1,1,6,0,0,"0545550099",129,""

Table 3-35: CUSD Termination Cause Table Index
Termination Cause

December 31, 2007

Index

NO_CAUSE

0

CC_BUSY

1

PARAMETER_ERROR

2

INVALID_NUMBER

3

OUTGOING_CALL_BARRED

4

TOO_MANY_CALLS_ON_HOLD

5

NORMAL

6

DROPPED

10

NETWORK

12

INVALID_CALL_ID

13

NORMAL_CLEARING

14

TOO_MANY_ACTIVE_CALLS

16

UNASSIGNED_NUMBER

17

NO_ROUTE_TO_DEST

18

RESOURCE_UNAVAILABLE

19

CALL_BARRED

20

USER_BUSY

21

NO_ANSWER

22

CALL_REJECTED

23

NUMBER_CHANGED

24

DEST_OUT_OF_ORDER

25

SIGNALING_ERROR

26

NETWORK_ERROR

27

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-67

Call Control

Table 3-35: CUSD Termination Cause Table Index (Cont.)
Termination Cause

3-68

Index

NETWORK_BUSY

28

NOT_SUBSCRIBED

29

SERVICE_UNAVAILABLE

31

SERVICE_NOT_SUPPORTED

32

PREPAY_LIMIT_REACHED

33

INCOMPATIBLE_DEST

35

ACCESS_DENIED

43

FEATURE_NOT_AVAILABLE

45

WRONG_CALL_STATE

46

SIGNALING_TIMEOUT

47

MAX_MPTY_PARTICIPANTS_EXCEEDED

48

SYSTEM_FAILURE

49

DATA_MISSING

50

BASIC_SERVICE_NOT_PROVISIONED

51

ILLEGAL_SS_OPERATION

52

SS_INCOMPATIBILITY

53

SS_NOT_AVAILABLE

54

SS_SUBSCRIPTION_VIOLATION

55

INCORRECT_PASSWORD

56

TOO_MANY_PASSWORD_ATTEMPTS

57

PASSWORD_REGISTRATION_FAILURE

58

ILLEGAL_EQUIPMENT

59

UNKNOWN_SUBSCRIBER

60

ILLEGAL_SUBSCRIBER

61

ABSENT_SUBSCRIBER

62

USSD_BUSY

63

CANNOT_TRANSFER_MPTY_CALL

65

BUSY_WITH_UNANSWERED_CALL

66

UNANSWERED_CALL_PENDING

68

USSD_CANCELED

69

PRE_EMPTION

70

OPERATION_NOT_ALLOWED

71

NO_FREE_BEARER_AVAILABLE

72

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

Table 3-35: CUSD Termination Cause Table Index (Cont.)
Termination Cause

Index

NBR_SN_EXCEEDED

73

NBR_USER_EXCEEDED

74

Call Control by SIM Causes
NOT_ALLOWED_BY_CC

75

MODIFIED_TO_SS_BY_CC

76

MODIFIED_TO_CALL_BY_CC

77

CALL_MODIFIED_BY_CC

78

App. Cause
FDN_FAILURE

90

+COLP, Connected Line Identification Presentation
This command relates to the GSM supplementary service called COLP (Connected Line
Identification Presentation), which enables a calling subscriber to obtain the connected line
identity (COL) of the called party after setting up a mobile-originated call with the G24. For
example, after setting up a mobile-originated call to one number that is forwarded to another
number, the calling party will see the number of that third party.
When this command is enabled (and the called subscriber permits it), the following intermediate
result code is returned:
+COLP: ,[,,[,]].

Note: This command is activated when COLP is supported by the network.

Command Type
Set

Syntax
+COLP=

Response/Action

Remarks

OK
The Set command enables/disables the
+CME ERROR:  display of the COL at the TE on the

G24. It has no effect on the execution
of the COLR supplementary service on
the network. The value set by this
command is not retained after a power
cycle.

Read

+COLP?

+COLP: ,
The Read command displays the status
+CME ERROR:  of . It also initiates a query of the

COLP service provision status and
displays .

Test

December 31, 2007

+COLP=?

+COLP: (list of
The Test command displays the
supported values of .
supported s)
+CME ERROR: 

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-69

Call Control

The following table shows the +COLP parameters.
Table 3-36: +COLP Parameters


Description



Sets/displays the result code presentation status of the G24.
0
Disable (default)
1
Enable



Displays the subscriber’s COLP service status in the network.
0
COLP not provisioned
1
COLP provisioned
2
Unknown (for example, no network, and so on)



Sets the phone number, using the format specified by .



Sets the address octet type in integer format (refer to GSM 04.08 [8] subclause
10.5.4.7).
129 Unknown
145 International (used when dialing string includes "+" international access code
character)



Sets the subaddress, using the format specified by .



Sets the address octet type in integer format (refer to GSM 04.08 [8] subclause
10.5.4.8).



An optional, string-type, alphanumeric representation of  corresponding to
the entry found in the phonebook. The character set is defined by +CSCS (Refer to
“+CSCS, Select Terminal Character Set”, page 3-4).

Example
AT+COLP=0
OK
AT+COLP=2
+CME ERROR: Numeric parameter out of bounds

3-70

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

Phone and Date Books and Clock
Directory Access Commands - Phone Book
This set of commands enables read/write access to the phone book contained within the G24,
including both the numeric and the alpha information contained in the location. The presentation
is according to GSM 07.07.
In some cases, it may be possible to use these commands to access the dialed and received call
stacks. However, as these phone books cannot be edited, the +CPBW command does not work on
them.

+CPBS, Select Phone Book Memory
This command handles the selection of the memory to be used for reading and writing entries in
the G24’s phone books’ memory. (When there is separate storage on the SIM card and in the
G24’s internal EEPROM).

Command
Type

Syntax

Response/Action

Remarks

Set

AT+CPBS=
[,]
is optional
while  =
"FD" only

OK
The Set command selects the phone
book memory storage which is to be
or:
used by other phone book commands.
+CME ERROR: 

Read

+CPBS?

+CPBS:
The Read command returns the
[,,]

total number of entries in the phone
book memory.
Test

+CPBS=?

+CPBS: (list of
supported s)
OK

Test command returns the supported
storages as a compound value.

Note: Read format of +CPBS joins RC and MC, therefore the united list will be prompted.

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-71

Phone and Date Books and Clock

The following table shows the +CPBS parameters.
Table 3-37: +CPBS Parameters



Description
List of supported phone books and their storage IDs
AD Abbreviated dialing numbers.
DC ME dialed calls list (+CPBW is not applicable for this storage).
EN SIM emergency numbers (+CPBW is not applicable for this storage).
FD
SIM Fixed dialing phone book.
MC G24 missed (unanswered received) calls list (+CPBW may not be applicable
for this storage).
ME G24 phone book.
MT Combined G24 and SIM phone book.
ON SIM own numbers (MSISDNs) list (reading this storage is also available
through +CNUM).
QD Quick dial phone book.
RC G24 received calls list (+CPBW may not be applicable for this storage).
SD
Service dialing numbers.
SM SIM phone book.
The default phone book is AD.



Integer type value indicating the number of used locations in the selected memory.



Integer type value indicating the total number of entries in the selected phone book
memory.



String type. PIN2 password 4 - 8 digits.

Example
AT+CPBS="ME"
OK
AT+CPBR=?
+CPBR: (1-500,40,24)
OK
AT+CPBR=1
OK
AT+CPBR=1,3 //There is nothing written in entry 1,2,3
OK
AT+CPBS="MT"
OK
AT+CPBR=?
+CPBR: (1-750,40,24)
OK
AT+CPBR=1,3
OK
AT+CPBR=1,750
+CPBR: 101,"+97252999080", 145,"Voice Mail"
OK
AT+CPBS="FD",""
OK // +CPBW pin2 unlocked

3-72

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

AT+CPBW=1,"034546565",129,"xyz"// Write into FD storage
OK
AT+CPBS="FD",""
+CME ERROR: incorrect password
AT+CPBS="AD",""
+CME ERROR: operation not allowed
AT+CPBS="FD",""
+CME ERROR: text string too long

+CPBR, Read Phone Book Entries
This command recalls phone book entries from a specific entry number or from a range of entries.
If only one entry is specified, and that entry is empty, OK is returned. If a range of entries is
requested, all entries that contain data within that range are returned. If a listing fails in a G24
error, +CME ERROR:  is returned.
This command can also be used to obtain information about the number of entries and the
maximum size of a phone number and alpha tag fields in the phone book.
This command acts on the currently active phone book, as selected with the +CPBS command
(Refer to “+CPBS, Select Phone Book Memory”, page 3-71).

Command
Type

Syntax

Response/Action

Remarks

Set

+CPBR=
[,]

[+CPBR:
,,,
[
+CPBR:
,,,]]
OK
or:
+CME ERROR: 

The Set command returns
phone book entries.

Test

+CPBR=?

+CPBR: (list of supported
s),[], []
OK

The Test command
returns the entry range
supported by the current
storage as a compound
value and the maximum
lengths of the 
and  fields.

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-73

Phone and Date Books and Clock

The following table shows the +CPBR parameters.
Table 3-38: +CPBR Parameters


Description




Index for a given phone book entry



Phone number of a given entry



The address type of a phone number
129 Use for local call
145 Use “+” for international access code
128 Unknown
"128" is used to represent an email address or a mailing list. In this case, 
can be used to further differentiate between the two.



Text identifier for a phone book entry, according to the character set as specified by
command +CSCS.



The maximum number of digits in the .



The maximum number of characters in the  entry

Note: The MC and RC have the same memory storage area, therefore there are only 10 entries

in total. Some of the entries are listed if the MC phone book is selected, and others are
listed if the RC phone book is selected. The phone book selection is done using the
AT+CPBS command.
Example
At+cpbs="ME"
OK
At+cpbr=?
+CPBR: (1-100,40,24)
OK
At+cpbr=1
OK
At+cpbr=1,3 //There is nothing written in entry 1,2,3
OK
At+cpbs="MT"
OK
At+cpbr=?
+CPBR: (1-350,40,24)
OK
At+cpbr=1,3
OK
At+cpbr=1,350
+CPBR: 101,"+97252999080",145,"Voice Mail"
OK

3-74

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

+CPBF, Find Phone Book Entries
This execution command enables the user to search for a particular entry, by name, in the
currently active phone book. If no matching entry is found, the command returns OK. If multiple
matches are found, all are returned.

Command
Type

Syntax

Response/Action

Set

+CPBF=

[+CPBF: ,,,[[...]

+CBPF: ,,,]]
OK
or:
+CME ERROR: 

Test

AT+CPBF=?

+CPBF: [],[]
OK

The following table shows the +CPBF parameters.
Table 3-39: +CPBF Parameters


Description



Case-sensitive text substring to search for, according to the character set specified by
the +CSCS command.




Index for a given phone book entry



Phone number of a given entry



The address type of a phone number
129 Use for local call
145 Use “+” for international access code
128 Unknown
Note: "128" is used to represent an email address or a mailing list. In this case,

 can be used to further differentiate between the two.


Text identifier for a phone book entry that starts with the substring ,
according to the character set as specified by command +CSCS.

Example
AT+CPBS="MT" //Selecting phone book
OK
AT+CPBF="k" //Searching for "k" and not finding it
OK
AT+CPBF="Voice" //Searching for string "Voice" and finding Voice Mail
+CPBF: 101,"+97252999080",145,"Voice Mail"
OK
AT+CPBF="" //Searching for everything in phone book, and finding all entries

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-75

Phone and Date Books and Clock

+CPBF: 2,"8475767800",129,"Moto Voicemail"
+CPBF: 101,"+97252999080",145,"Voice Mail"
OK
AT+CPBF="Moto"
+CPBF: 2,"8475767800",129,"Moto Voicemail"

+CPBW, Write Phone Book Entry
This command enables the user to store a new entry in the phone book, or edit/delete an existing
entry from the phone book. A particular entry in the phone book can be stored, or the next
available entry is used.
This command writes the entry in the currently active phone book, selected with the +CPBS
command (Refer to “+CPBS, Select Phone Book Memory”, page 3-71). The entry is selected by
, the phone number is entered into the  field and text associated with the
number is entered into the  field. If these fields are omitted, the phone book entry is
deleted. If the  field is omitted, but a number is entered in the  field, the phone
number is entered into the first available entry in the phone book. If the writing fails in a G24
error, +CME ERROR:  is returned.
The phone book and date book are share dynamic memory storage. If the writing fail in a G24
error in case of "full memory" error while the memory is not full by 'used' field of +CPBS
command (Refer to “+CPBS, Select Phone Book Memory” on page 3-71). It is recommended
checking the memory's capacity of the dynamic memory storage by +MPDPM command (Refer
to “+MPDPM, Motorola Phonebook Dynamic Percentage Memory” on page 3-85).
Note: The "FD" phone book supports single wild card characters (?) and prefixes of a number

in the telephone number field. In cases of fixed dialing, these entries in the "FD" phone
book define a group of permitted numbers.
Call indications related to a fixed dialing entry containing wild cards or only a prefix of
a number do not display any  identifier.

Command
Type

3-76

Syntax

Response/Action

Set

AT+CPBW=[][,

[,[,]]]

OK
or:
+CME ERROR: 

Test

AT+CPBW=?

+CPBW: (list of
supported
s),[],
(list of supported
s),[]
OK

AT Commands Reference Manual

Remarks

This command queries the
allowable command field and
sizes.

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

The following table shows the +CPBW parameters.
Table 3-40: +CPBW Parameters


Description



Index for a given phone book entry



Phone number of a given entry



The address type of a phone number
129 Use for local call
145 Use “+” for international access code
128 Unknown
Note: "128" is used to represent an email address or a mailing list. In this case,

 can be used to further differentiate between the two.


Text identifier for a phone book entry, according to the character set as specified by
command +CSCS.



The maximum size of a phone number, in digits. There is a limited number of PB
records that can be stored with this length. The number of "long" PB records depends
on the size of the SIM card EXT1 extension file. If the extension file is full, an
attempt to store a new record with more than 20 digits returns an error.



The maximum number of characters in the  entry. This applies to GSM standard
characters only. Non-GSM standard character sets and extended GSM characters
require additional space in storage. In some cases, when using such characters the text
cannot be stored. In this case, the G24 returns a "text string too long"error.

Example
AT+CPBS="MT"
OK
AT+CPBW=?
+CPBW: (1-750),40,(129,145),16
OK

+CSVM, Set Voice Mail Server
This command handles the selection of the number to the voice mail server. The new value should
also remain after power cycle.

Command
Type
Set

December 31, 2007

Syntax
+CSVM=
[,[,<
type>]]

Response/Action
OK
+CME ERROR: 

AT Commands Reference Manual

Remarks
The Set command sets the number to
the voice mail server.

3-77

Phone and Date Books and Clock

Command
Type

Syntax

Response/Action

Remarks

Read

+CSVM?

+CSVM:, The Read command displays the
currently selected voice mail number
,
and status (enabled or disabled).
+CME ERROR: 

Test

+CSVM=?

+CSVM: (list of supported
The Test command displays the list of
s), (list of supported supported s and s.
s)
+CME ERROR: 

The following table shows the +CSVM parameters.
Table 3-41: +CSVM Parameters


Description



0
1



Voice mail number in string. String can be of up to 32 characters long, starting with a
digit, or "+". Other allowed characters are digits only (0..9).



Address octet type.
129 ISDN/telephony marketing plan; national/international number unknown
145 ISDN/telephony numbering plan; international number
When the dialing string includes the international access code character (+), the
default is 145. Otherwise, the default  is 129.

Disables the voice mail number (default)
Enables the voice mail number

Note: If  is set to 0,  and  are ignored. If  is set to 1, 

is mandatory.
Example
AT+CSVM=?
+CSVM: (0,1),(129,145)
OK
AT+CSVM=1,"+972555123456","145"
OK
AT+CSVM?
+CSVM: 1,"972555123456",145
OK

+MDSI, Motorola Deactivate SIM Card Indication
This command enables unsolicited reporting of indications of SIM deactivation and invalidation.
The indications include the cause for deactivation and invalidation.
This command is a basic command, which means the G24 module should accept the command
and act according to received parameters regardless of SIM presence and phone lock state.

3-78

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

In MUX mode, this AT command is allowed on DLC2 only.

Command Type

Syntax

Response/Action

Remarks

Set

+MDSI=

When mode is 1 and
SIM was invalidated or
deactivated: [+MDSI:
, , , ]
OK
+CME ERROR: 

The following is the available mode
values for the Set command.
 = 1 - Defines that unsolicited
+MDSI messages will be sent to the
DTE. If the SIM card was invalidated
or deactivated, the current status will
be sent to the DTE.
 = 0 - No unsolicited message
is sent to the DTE.

Read

+MDSI?

+MDSI: 
The Read command queries the current
settings for 
OK
+CME ERROR: 

Test

+MDSI=?

+MDSI: (list of
The Test command returns the possible
 values.
supported s)
OK
+CME ERROR: 

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-79

Phone and Date Books and Clock

The following table shows the +MDSI parameters.
Table 3-42: +MDSI Parameters


Description



0
1

Unsolicited indications off
Unsolicited indications on

, 

0
1
2

"DEACTIVATE". SIM deactivate request was sent with 
"GSM". Invalidate SIM for GSM services was sent with 
"GPRS". Invalidate SIM for GPRS services was sent with 

,


 and  related to  = 0 ("DEACTIVATE"):
1 "Bad SIM"
 and  related to  = 1 ("GSM") and  = 2 ("GPRS"):
0
"No reject cause"
2
"IMSI unknown in HLR"
3
"Illegal MS"
4
"IMSI unknown in VLR"
5
"IMEI not accepted"
6
"Illegal ME"
7
"GPRS service not allowed"
8
"GPRS and non-GPRS services not allowed"
9
"MS identity cannot be derived by the network"
10
"Implicity detached"
11
"PLMN not allowed"
12
"Location area not allowed"
13
"Roaming not allowed in this location area"
14
"GPRS services not allowed in this PLMN"
16
"MSC temporarily not reachable"
17
"Network failure"
22
"Congestion"
32
"Service option not supported"
33
"Requested Service option not subscribed"
34
"Service option temporarily out of order"
38
"Call cannot be identified"
48
"Retry on entry to new cell"
95
"Semantically incorrect message"
96
"Invalid mandatory information"
97
"Message type non existent"
98
"Message type not compatible with call state"
99
"Info element not-existent or not implemented"
100
"Conditional IE error"
101
"Message not compatible with protocol state"
111
"Protocol error, unspecified"
240
"Location update failure"
241
"Combined LU failure"
242
"Authentication and ciphering reject"
243
"Authentication reject"
244
"Attach failure"
In all other cases , "unspecified"

Example
AT+MDSI?
+MDSI: 0

3-80

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

OK
AT+MDSI=?
+MDSI: (000,001)
OK
AT+MDSI=1
OK
//Until now there was no deactivation or invalidation of SIM card.
AT+MDSI?
+MDSI: 1
OK
//SIM card does not support GPRS
+MDSI: 2, 7, "GPRS", "GPRS services not allowed"
//Insert a SIM card that is no longer subscribed
AT+CPIN="1764"
OK
AT+COPS=0
OK
//Unsolicited messages
+MDSI: 1, 2, "GSM", "IMSI unknown in HLR"
+MDSI: 0, 1, "DEACTIVATE", "Bad SIM"
// Insert a good SIM card, and roam to a network that doesn't have a
GPRS roaming agreement.
//Unsolicited messages
+MDSI: 2, 14, "GPRS", "GPRS services not allowed in this PLMN"
AT+CGATT?
+CGATT: 0
OK

+MCSN, Motorola Change Subscriber Number
This AT command sets EFmsisdn in the SIM. The setting is placed in the given , using
 and  as the values to be set.
Additionally, when setting the number in a specific storage space, the  parameter defines
whether that  and corresponding should be presented after entering the correct
PIN number.
After entering the correct PIN number, the last , whose  was set to 1, is sent to the
DTE. This indication is unsolicited and appears when SIM information is ready.
Note: At any given time, only one  or no  can have  = 1. Therefore,

setting  = 1 for one of the supported es implicitly means that all other
es have  = 0.
Set Command
The Set command sets EFmsisdn in the SIM. The setting is placed in the given , using
 and  as the values to be set.
If only the  value is given, then the Set command is interpreted as follows:
•  = 0 - Do not show any number on next +CPIN insertion command

•  = 1 - Default  (equals 1) is set to  = 1

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-81

Phone and Date Books and Clock

If only a pair of  and  values are given, then the Set command is interpreted as
follows:
•  = 0,  = any valid indexSet mode for given index to 0

•  = 1,  = any valid indexSet mode for given index to 1
If only ,  and  values are given, then the Set command is interpreted as
follows:
• Store in  of EFmsisdn in the SIM, the . Since no  was given,
corresponding  will be identical to the  already stored in this . Also
store the  value for this .
If all parameters are given, then the Set command is interpreted as follows:
• Store in  of EFmsisdn in the SIM, the  and corresponding . In case
an empty string was given as the  parameter, the corresponding  will be an
empty string. Also store the  value for this .
Note: Only the last  whose mode was set to 1 will be sent to the DTE.

Command Type

3-82

Syntax

Response/Action

Remarks

Set

+MCSN=
[,[,[,]]]

OK
See above
or:
+CME ERROR: 

Read

+MCSN?

+MCSN: 
OK
or:
+CME ERROR: 

Test

+MCSN=?

+MCSN: (list of
The Test command returns the possible
 and  values.
supported
s),(list of
supported es)
OK
or:
+CME ERROR: 

AT Commands Reference Manual

The Read command queries the current
settings for the  of the storage
place in which the  is equal to
1. If no index has its  set to 1,
then the response  will be
equal to 0.

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

The following table shows the +MCSN parameters.
Table 3-43: +MCSN Parameters


Description



This value defines whether  and corresponding  tag are presented
after entering a correct PIN number.
0
Do not show  and  in  after entering correct PIN
number
1
Show  and  in  after entering correct PIN number
The default value is 0 (before MCSN has been set for the first time.



An integer value between 1 and 5 representing the storage place in EFmsisdn in the
SIM.
1 - 5 Index of the storage place
The default value is 1.
The number of records in EFmsisdn is SIM-dependent and can be less than 5.



Phone number to set in the phonebook. The string type representing the phone number
is written within double quotes.
Valid input characters are: 0-9 and + (at start only)
The number of digits the  parameter is built of can vary from a minimum of
0 to a maximum of 20 digits.



Text related to . The string type text associated with the phone number is
written within double quotes.
The character set used for text is the one selected by the command Select TE
Character Set (AT+CSCS).
The number of characters comprising the  parameter can vary from a
minimum of 0 to a maximum
of 14.

Example
AT+CNUM// Reading EFmsisdn from the SIM
+CNUM: "","",0
+CNUM: "","",0
+CNUM: "","",0
+CNUM: "","",0
+CNUM: "","",0
OK
AT+MCSN=1,1,"054444444","VOICE"// Setting record 1 in EFmsisdn in the SIM
// Enable unsolicited indication
OK
AT+MCSN=0,2,"039999999","OFFICE"// Setting record 2 in EFmsisdn in the SIM
OK
AT+MCSN=0,3,"1111","PIN1"// Setting record 3 in EFmsisdn in the SIM
OK
AT+MCSN=0,4,"8523","PIN2"// Setting record 4 in EFmsisdn in the SIM
OK
AT+CNUM// Reading EFmsisdn from the SIM
+CNUM: "VOICE","054444444",129
+CNUM: "OFFICE","039999999",129
+CNUM: "PIN1","1111",129

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-83

Phone and Date Books and Clock

+CNUM: "PIN2","8523",129
+CNUM: "","",0
OK
AT+MCSN?
+MCSN: 1
OK
// Restart Phone
AT+CPIN="1111"
OK
// Unsolicited information of record 1 in EFmsisdn in the SIM
+MCSN: "VOICE","054444444"
AT+MCSN=0// Disable unsolicited indication
OK
// Restart Phone
AT+CPIN="1111"
OK
AT+MCSN=0,3,,"ada"
ERROR
AT+MCSN=0,3,"3456346"// Update the  of record 3 same 
OK
AT+CNUM// Reading EFmsisdn from the SIM
+CNUM: "VOICE","054444444",129
+CNUM: "OFFICE","039999999",129
+CNUM: "PIN1","3456346",129
+CNUM: "PIN2","8523",129
+CNUM: "","",0
OK
AT+MCSN=0,3,"","FAX"// Update the  of record 3 same 
OK
AT+CNUM// Reading EFmsisdn from the SIM
+CNUM: "VOICE","054444444",129
+CNUM: "OFFICE","039999999",129
+CNUM: "FAX","",0
+CNUM: "PIN2","8523",129
+CNUM: "","",0
OK
AT+MCSN=0,3,"",""// Resetting record 3 in EFmsisdn in the SIM
OK
AT+CNUM// Reading EFmsisdn from the SIM
+CNUM: "VOICE","054444444",129
+CNUM: "OFFICE","039999999",129
+CNUM: "","",0
+CNUM: "PIN2","8523",129
+CNUM: "","",0
OK

3-84

AT Commands Reference Manual

December 31, 2007

Chapter 3: AT Commands Reference

+MPDPM, Motorola Phonebook Dynamic Percentage Memory
This command returns the collective percentage of memory used by the phonebook and datebook
in their shared dynamic memory storage. A single percentage value is returned representing the
combined percentage used by both the phonebook and datebook.

Command Type
Read

Syntax
+MPDPM?

Response/Action

Remarks

+MPDPM: 
OK
or:
+CME ERROR: 

The Read command
queries the current
(combined) percentage
used by the phonebook
and datebook in their
shared dynamic memory
storage.

The following table shows the +MPDPM parameters.
Table 3-44: +MPDPM Parameters



Description
The percentage of memory used together by both the phonebook and datebook in their
shared dynamic memory storage.

Example
AT+MPDPM?
+MPDPM: 0
OK
AT+CPBS="mt"
OK
AT+CPBR=?
+CPBR: (001-350),040,016
OK
AT+CPBR=1,100
OK
AT+CPBW=,"035658020",129,"Phone0"
OK
AT+CPBW=,"035658021",129,"Phone1"
OK
AT+CPBW=,"035658022",129,"Phone2"
OK
AT+CPBW=,"035658023",129,"Phone3"
OK
AT+CPBW=,"035658024",129,"Phone4"
OK
AT+CPBW=,"035658025",129,"Phone5"
OK
AT+CPBW=,"035658026",129,"Phone6"

December 31, 2007

AT Commands Reference Manual

3-85

Phone and Date Books and Clock

OK
AT+CPBW=,"035658027",129,"Phone7"
OK
AT+CPBW=,"035658028",129,"Phone8"
OK
AT+CPBW=,"035658029",129,"Phone9"
OK
AT+CPBW=,"035658030",129,"Phone10"
OK
AT+MPDPM?
+MPDPM: 2
OK

Directory Access Commands - Date Book
+MALARM, Date Book Reminder Unsolicited Report
This unsolicited event is sent to the terminal indicating a date book reminder is activated.
Note: The date book reminder is accompanied by alert. The alert is not programmable. The

configuration of all date book reminders set by +MDBGD command and the date book
reminder's duration was defined by  parameter of +MDBW command. If
multiple date book reminders are set to go off at the same time, they will come up in
sequence i.e. after one date book reminder is exited, the next date book reminder will
come up. The date book reminder can be stopped in two ways, inserting +MALMH
command or  parameter is expired. When date book reminder has to wakeup
while any call is running, it will pass to delay mode until the call will end and afterward
it is activated. When incoming any call while date book reminder is activate, the incoming
call is stopping the date book reminder and is connecting. The date book reminder is none
basic and is not supported in UART2 mode.
Syntax
+MALARM:,",","